POWER RUN

HOLD

ml/hr
OPT PRI HLD SEC KVO

PRI SEC
OPTIONS

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
. 0 Clear Enter

A B
RUN RUN
HOLD POWER POWER HOLD

ml/hr ml/hr
KVO OPT HLD PRI SEC PRI SEC HLD OPT KVO

PRI SEC
A B OPTIONS

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
• 0 Clear Enter

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System

Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

Technical Service Manual

 GENERAL CONTACT INFORMATION

ALARIS Medical Systems, Inc.

10221 Wateridge Circle
San Diego, California 92121

Customer Advocacy - North America

Clinical and technical feedback.
Phone: (800) 854-7128, Ext. 7812
E-Mail: [email protected]

Technical Support - North America

Maintenance and service information support; troubleshooting.

United States: Canada:

Phone: Phone:
(858) 458-6003 Eastern: (800) 908-9918
(800) 854-7128, Ext. 6003 Western: (800) 908-9919

Customer Care - North America

Instrument return, service assistance, and order placement.

United States: Canada:

Phone: Phone:
(800) 482-4822 (800) 387-8309

Technical Support and Customer Care - UK

Maintenance and service information support.
Instrument return, service assistance, and order placement.
Customer Service: Technical Support:
Freephone: 0800 917 8776 Freephone: 0800 389 6972
Fax: 01256 330 860

This Technical Service Manual is subject to change without notification.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

Technical Service Manual
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Chapter 1 - General Information

1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 Precaution Definitions ................................................................................ 1-2
1.3 Specifications ......................................................................................... 1-2
1.4 Accessories ........................................................................................... 1-2
1.4.1 Nurse Call (7130/7230 only) ......................................................................... 1-2
1.4.2 Learn/Teach RS-232 Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.4.3 Flow Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.5 Alarms, Errors, Messages ........................................................................... 1-7
1.5.1 Silencing Alarms ...................................................................................... 1-7
1.6 Battery Management System ........................................................................ 1-7
1.6.1 Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.6.2 Battery and Charging Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.6.3 Refresh Cycle ......................................................................................... 1-8
1.6.4 Battery Gauge ........................................................................................ 1-10
1.6.5 Power On/Off ......................................................................................... 1-10
1.6.6 Lower LCD Display ................................................................................... 1-11
1.6.7 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.6.8 Battery Maintenance ................................................................................. 1-11
1.7 NiCad Battery Capacity Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.8 Dynamic Monitoring® System (DMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1.9 Data Communications Function ..................................................................... 1-16
1.10 Trumpet and Start-Up Curves ....................................................................... 1-16

Chapter 2A - Checkout and Configuration (Software Versions 4.06 and 4.08)

2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-1
2.2 New Instrument Checkout ........................................................................... 2A-1
2.3 Configurable Options and Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-1
2.4 Configuration Procedure ............................................................................. 2A-2
2.4.1 Entering Configuration Mode ........................................................................ 2A-3
2.4.2 Setting to Defaults .................................................................................... 2A-3
2.4.3 Regional Settings ..................................................................................... 2A-4
2.4.4 Setting Air-in-Line Threshold ........................................................................ 2A-4
2.4.5 Profiles ................................................................................................ 2A-5
2.4.6 Setting Maximum Rate ............................................................................... 2A-6
2.4.7 Setting Computer Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-6
2.4.8 Setting Optional Modes .............................................................................. 2A-7

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 i

Technical Service Manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Chapter 2A - Checkout and Configuration (Continued)

2.4.9 Setting Optional Features ............................................................................ 2A-8
2.4.10 Setting KVO Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-9
2.4.11 Setting Dynamic Monitoring® System Features .................................................... 2A-10
2.4.12 Setting Audio Volume ................................................................................ 2A-12
2.4.13 Setting Configuration Name (Instrument ID Label) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-13
2.4.14 Resistance Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-14
2.4.15 Pressure Options ..................................................................................... 2A-15
2.4.16 Manual Baseline ...................................................................................... 2A-16
2.5 Transferring Settings to Another Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-17
2.5.1 Learn/Teach Instrument Procedure ................................................................. 2A-18
2.5.2 Pop-Up Displays ...................................................................................... 2A-19

Chapter 2B - Checkout and Configuration (Software Version 2.78)

2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-1
2.2 New Instrument Checkout ........................................................................... 2B-1
2.3 Configurable Options and Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-1
2.4 Configuration Procedure ............................................................................. 2B-2
2.4.1 Entering Configuration Mode ........................................................................ 2B-3
2.4.2 Setting to Defaults .................................................................................... 2B-3
2.4.3 Setting Language ..................................................................................... 2B-4
2.4.4 Setting Air-in-Line Threshold ........................................................................ 2B-4
2.4.5 Setting Dose Rate Drugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-5
2.4.6 Setting Maximum Rate ............................................................................... 2B-7
2.4.7 Setting Computer Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-8
2.4.8 Setting Optional Modes .............................................................................. 2B-9
2.4.9 Setting Optional Features ............................................................................ 2B-10
2.4.10 Setting KVO Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-10
2.4.11 Setting Dynamic Monitoring® System Features .................................................... 2B-11
2.4.12 Setting Audio Volume ................................................................................ 2B-14
2.4.13 Setting Configuration Name (Instrument ID Label) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-14
2.5 Transferring Settings to Another Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-15
2.5.1 Learn/Teach Instrument Procedure ................................................................. 2B-15
2.5.2 Pop-Up Displays ...................................................................................... 2B-16
2.6 Resistance Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-17
2.7 Pressure Options ..................................................................................... 2B-18

ii Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

Technical Service Manual
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Chapter 3 - Preventive Maintenance

3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 Preventive Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2.1 Regular Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2.2 Functional Test ....................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.3 Flow Stop Test ........................................................................................ 3-3
3.2.4 Rate Calibration Procedure .......................................................................... 3-3
3.2.5 Post Calibration Rate Accuracy Verification ........................................................ 3-5
3.2.6 Pressure Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.2.7 Ground Current Leakage Test ....................................................................... 3-9
3.2.8 Ground Resistance Test ............................................................................. 3-9
3.2.9 Battery Refresh Cycle ................................................................................ 3-9
3.2.10 Reset Time ............................................................................................ 3-10
3.2.11 Reset PM Due ........................................................................................ 3-10
3.3 Storage and Cleaning ................................................................................ 3-10
3.3.1 Storage ................................................................................................ 3-10

Chapter 4 - Principles of Operation

4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 General Information .................................................................................. 4-1
4.3 Overview .............................................................................................. 4-2
4.4 Main PCB ............................................................................................. 4-3
4.4.1 CPU Kernel ........................................................................................... 4-3
4.4.2 Combo IC ............................................................................................. 4-4
4.4.3 EEPROM .............................................................................................. 4-4
4.4.4 RAM ................................................................................................... 4-4
4.4.5 Flash EEPROM ....................................................................................... 4-5
4.4.6 RS-232 Interface ..................................................................................... 4-5
4.5 Power System ........................................................................................ 4-7
4.5.1 Battery Manager ...................................................................................... 4-7
4.5.2 AC Off-Line Switcher ................................................................................. 4-8
4.5.3 Battery Charge Regulator ............................................................................ 4-8
4.5.4 Refresh Cycle Load .................................................................................. 4-9
4.5.5 VAO Shutdown ....................................................................................... 4-9
4.5.6 AC Line Sense ........................................................................................ 4-9
4.5.7 System Power Source Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.5.8 Battery Voltage Monitor .............................................................................. 4-10

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 iii
Technical Service Manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Chapter 4 - Principles of Operation (Continued)

4.5.9 VMEAS ................................................................................................ 4-10
4.5.10 Voltage Reference 4.1V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.5.11 System Current Monitor .............................................................................. 4-11
4.5.12 Always On Supply (+5VAO) ......................................................................... 4-11
4.5.13 System Switching Supplies .......................................................................... 4-11
4.5.14 VRAM Supply ......................................................................................... 4-13
4.5.15 VPOS Supply ......................................................................................... 4-13
4.5.16 Battery Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.5.17 System Watchdog .................................................................................... 4-14
4.5.18 Power Switch ......................................................................................... 4-15
4.5.19 System Reset/Power On ............................................................................. 4-16
4.5.20 Lower LCD Display Backlight Drive ................................................................. 4-16
4.6 Motor Drive/Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4.6.1 Motor Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4.6.2 Air-in-Line Sensor .................................................................................... 4-20
4.6.3 Transducer ............................................................................................ 4-20
4.7 User Interface ......................................................................................... 4-21
4.7.1 Main Speaker Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4.7.2 Backup Audio Buzzer and Test Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4.8 LED Module .......................................................................................... 4-23
4.9 Lower LCD Display ................................................................................... 4-24
4.10 Main LCD Module .................................................................................... 4-24
4.10.1 Main LCD Backlight .................................................................................. 4-25
4.10.2 Graphic LCD Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4.11 Nurse Call Circuit (7130/7230 only) ................................................................. 4-25
4.12 Panel Lock Switch .................................................................................... 4-25
4.13 ECD Board ............................................................................................ 4-25

Chapter 5 - Corrective Maintenance

5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 Disassembly/Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2.1 Removing Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.2.2 Separating Case Assemblies ........................................................................ 5-5
5.2.3 Removing Power Supply Board Assembly ......................................................... 5-11
5.2.4 Removing ECD and RS-232 Board Assemblies ................................................... 5-13

iv Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

Technical Service Manual
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Chapter 5 - Corrective Maintenance (Continued)

5.2.5 Removing Line Filter ................................................................................. 5-16
5.2.6 Removing Speaker Fan .............................................................................. 5-17
5.2.7 Removing Pole Clamp ............................................................................... 5-18
5.2.8 Disconnecting Cables ............................................................................... 5-21
5.2.9 Removing Main Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5.2.10 Removing LED and LCD Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.2.11 Removing Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5.2.12 Removing AIL Transmitter (Arm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5.2.13 Removing AIL Receiver (Button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
5.2.14 Removing Seal Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5.2.15 Removing Mechanism Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
5.2.16 Removing Keypad Assembly ........................................................................ 5-33
5.2.17 Routing and Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
5.3 Test and Calibration .................................................................................. 5-38
5.3.1 Power-On Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
5.3.2 Mechanism Visual Check ............................................................................ 5-38
5.3.3 Mechanical Leak Test ................................................................................ 5-42
5.3.4 Pressure Verification and Calibration Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
5.3.5 Set Sensor Check .................................................................................... 5-43
5.3.6 Test Run Mode ....................................................................................... 5-44
5.3.7 Hard Pressure Cal Procedure ....................................................................... 5-45
5.3.8 Checking Pressure Calibration Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
5.4 Level of Testing Guidelines .......................................................................... 5-47

Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2 Diagnostics Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.2.1 Entering Diagnostics Mode .......................................................................... 6-11
6.2.2 Setting Preventive Maintenance Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.2.3 Viewing Alarm or Event History (Event Log) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.2.4 Setting Time (and Date) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.2.5 Viewing Battery Status ............................................................................... 6-16
6.2.6 Changing Rated Capacity of Battery ................................................................ 6-17
6.2.7 Viewing DC Voltages ................................................................................. 6-18
6.2.8 Setting ID Number .................................................................................... 6-18
6.2.9 Viewing Battery and Total Run Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6.2.10 Viewing Self-Check Timer ........................................................................... 6-19

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 v

Technical Service Manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting (Continued)

6.2.11 Testing Channel Sensors ............................................................................ 6-20
6.2.12 Viewing/Changing Rate Calibration Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6.2.13 Testing Main LCD .................................................................................... 6-22
6.2.14 Testing Aux (Lower) LCD ............................................................................ 6-22
6.2.15 Testing Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
6.2.16 Changing Main LCD Contrast ....................................................................... 6-23
6.2.17 Calibrating Channel Pressure ....................................................................... 6-24
6.2.18 DAC Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
6.2.19 Configuring Pressure System Auto Zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28

Chapter 7 - Illustrated Part Breakdown

7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.2 Illustrations ............................................................................................ 7-1
7.3 Parts List .............................................................................................. 7-1
7.4 Ordering Parts ........................................................................................ 7-2

List of Figures
1-1 Battery Refresh Cycle ................................................................................ 1-9
1-2 Lower LCD Display Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-3 Resistance Graph .................................................................................... 1-14
1-4 Pressure and Resistance Graph .................................................................... 1-15
2-1 Map of Configuration Screens (Software versions 4.06 and higher) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22A
2-2 Map of Configuration Screens (Software version 2.78) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23B
3-1 Rate Accuracy Test Setup ........................................................................... 3-5
3-2 Pressure Test Setup ................................................................................. 3-8
4-1 Main Block Diagram .................................................................................. 4-2
4-2 COMBO IC Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-3 Electrical Partitioning ................................................................................. 4-6
4-4 Battery Manager Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4-5 Battery Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4-6 Main Power Supply ................................................................................... 4-13
4-7 System Watchdog .................................................................................... 4-14
4-8 System Reset/Power On ............................................................................. 4-15
4-9 Motor Drive Circuit, Phase 1(A) ..................................................................... 4-19
4-10 Motor and Mechanism Sensors Block Diagram .................................................... 4-19
4-11 Air-in-Line Detector Block Diagram ................................................................. 4-20
4-12 Pressure Sensor Interface Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

vi Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

Technical Service Manual
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

List of Figures (Continued)

4-13 User Interface Block Diagram ....................................................................... 4-22
4-14 Main Speaker ......................................................................................... 4-23
4-15 Backup Audio ......................................................................................... 4-24
4-16 Lower LCD Display ................................................................................... 4-24
4-17 Flow Sensor Interface Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
5-1 Instrument Assembly Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5-2 View From Back of Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5-3 Alternate View From Back of Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5-4 Cap Handle Screws .................................................................................. 5-6
5-5 Hidden Case Screw in Battery Compartment ...................................................... 5-6
5-6 Case Screw and Pole Clamp Position .............................................................. 5-7
5-7 Separating Case Assemblies ........................................................................ 5-8
5-8 Locking Bar ........................................................................................... 5-8
5-9a Torque Sequence (Single) ........................................................................... 5-9
5-9b Torque Sequence (Dual) ............................................................................ 5-10
5-10a Removing Power Supply Board Assembly ......................................................... 5-11
5-10b Disconnecting Cable ................................................................................. 5-12
5-11 Rear Case ECD Board ............................................................................... 5-13
5-12 RS-232 Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5-13 RS-232 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5-14 Line Filter Assembly .................................................................................. 5-16
5-15 Speaker and Fan Assembly ......................................................................... 5-17
5-16 Pole Clamp Assembly ................................................................................ 5-19
5-17 Retaining Ring Installation ........................................................................... 5-20
5-18a Rear Case Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5-18b Front Case Cable Routing ........................................................................... 5-22
5-18c Front Case Cable Routing ........................................................................... 5-23
5-19 Removing Main Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5-20 LED / LCD Modules and Snap Fittings ............................................................. 5-26
5-21 Mechanism Latch in Middle Position ............................................................... 5-27
5-22 Remove Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5-23 Unlocking AIL Gear Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5-24 AIL Transmitter in Open Position .................................................................... 5-29
5-25 AIL Transmitter in Closed Position .................................................................. 5-29
5-26 Flat Edge of AIL Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
5-27 Faceplate Hook ....................................................................................... 5-30
5-28 Mechanism Latch in Middle Position ................................................................ 5-31

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 vii
Technical Service Manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS

List of Figures (Continued)

5-29 Apply RTV Under Edges of Seal .................................................................... 5-32
5-30a Front Case Cable Routing ........................................................................... 5-35
5-30b Front Case Cable Routing ........................................................................... 5-36
5-31 Rear Case Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
5-32 Mechanism Assembly Spring Location:
Between motor plate and clamp arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
5-33 Mechanism Assembly Spring Location:
Between back guide and clamp arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
5-34 Detail of Proper Mechanism Spring Position ....................................................... 5-41
5-35 Spring Installation Tool Position .................................................................... 5-41
5-36 Leak Test Setup ...................................................................................... 5-42
5-37 Run-In Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
5-38 Transducer Pot ....................................................................................... 5-45
6-1 Map of Diagnostic Screens .......................................................................... 6-28
7-1 Power Cord Wrap Kit (Item 403) .................................................................... 7-5
7-2a Case Assembly, Single Channel .................................................................... 7-6
7-2b Case Assembly, Dual Channel ...................................................................... 7-7
7-3a Front Case Assembly, Single Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7-3b Front Case Assembly, Dual Channel ............................................................... 7-10
7-4 Mechanism Assembly ................................................................................ 7-11
7-5a Rear Case Assembly, Single Channel .............................................................. 7-13
7-5b Rear Case Assembly, Dual Channel ................................................................ 7-14
7-6 Pole Clamp Assembly ................................................................................ 7-16
7-7 Label / Literature Locations .......................................................................... 7-19

List of Tables
1-1 Specifications ......................................................................................... 1-3
1-2 Battery Trip Points .................................................................................... 1-9
1-3 Abbreviations, Acronyms, Symbols ................................................................ 1-17
2-1 Record of Configured Instruments .................................................................. 2-20A
2-2 Drug List (7130/7230 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6B
2-3 Record of Configured Instruments .................................................................. 2-20B
2-4 Drug List Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22B
3-1 PM Inspections ....................................................................................... 3-11
4-1 Motor Control Signals ................................................................................ 4-18
5-1 Test Equipment ....................................................................................... 5-1

viii Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

List of Tables (Continued)

5-2 Level of Testing Guidelines .......................................................................... 5-47
6-1 Technical Troubleshooting Guide ................................................................... 6-1
6-2 Error Messages ....................................................................................... 6-5
6-3 Battery Manager Error Codes (not in Alarm History) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
7-1 Other Parts ............................................................................................ 7-3
7-2 Case Assembly ....................................................................................... 7-4
7-3 Front Case Assembly ................................................................................ 7-8
7-4 Mechanism Assembly ................................................................................ 7-11
7-5 Rear Case Assembly ................................................................................. 7-12
7-6 Pole Clamp Assembly ................................................................................ 7-15
7-7 Label / Literature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7-8 Packing Materials ................................................................................... 7-18

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 ix

Technical Service Manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS

T H I S PA G E
I N T E N T I O N A L LY
LEFT BLANK

x Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

Technical Service Manual
1 GENERAL INFORMATION
 Chapter 1 — GENERAL INFORMATION

CAUTION 1.1 INTRODUCTION

Do not use sharp objects (pens, pencils, etc.) This manual covers Signature Edition®
to activate switches, as this will damage the GOLD Infusion Systems, with software
keypad. versions 2.78, 4.06 and 4.08. It is used in
conjunction with an applicable Signature
Edition® GOLD Infusion System Directions
for Use (DFU).
This manual contains instructions for
maintenance, repair, and configuration of
the instrument. It is intended for personnel
experienced in the analysis,
troubleshooting, and repair of analog/digital
microprocessor-based electronic
equipment.

CAUTION If the instrument requires service while

under warranty, it is to be serviced only by
Any attempt to service an ALARIS Medical
ALARIS Medical Systems authorized
Systems instrument by anyone other than an
service personnel. Refer to the “Service
authorized ALARIS Medical Systems Service
Information” and “Warranty” sections of the
Representative while the instrument is under
applicable Signature Edition® GOLD
warranty may invalidate the warranty.
Infusion System DFU.
The Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion
System includes:
• Single-Channel, Models 7130/7131
• Dual-Channel, Models 7230/7231
• AccuSlide® Flow Regulator
administration sets
The Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion
System series includes the following
configurations:
• 7130B, 7130D, 7130E
• 7131A, 7131B
• 7230B, 7230D, 7230E
• 7231A, 7231B

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 1-1
Technical Service Manual
GENERAL INFORMATION

1.1 INTRODUCTION (Continued) 1.2 PRECAUTION DEFINITIONS

7130/7131 and 7230/7231 Series: A WARNING is an alert to a potential
hazard which could result in serious
• is a 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz instruments
personal injury and/or instrument damage if
family that supports both single and dual
proper procedures are not followed.
channel fluid delivery
A CAUTION is an alert to a potential
• features user-interactive software
hazard which could result in minor personal
• displays prompts, alarms and alert injury and/or instrument damage if proper
messages, and troubleshooting procedures are not followed.
information on main LCD display
1.3 SPECIFICATIONS
• can be configured to specific operational
requirements Refer to Table 1-1.
• allows upgrades for future instrument
1.4 ACCESSORIES
enhancements
Accessory items are available for use with
• has been designed to interface with
the instrument. These items are described
accessory equipment.
in the following paragraphs.
7131/7231 Series key differences from
7130/7230 Series are: 1.4.1 Nurse Call (7130/7230 only)
• HARDWARE All instruments are equipped with the nurse
call feature. Alarms and some alerts from
The 7131/7231 Series is labeled for
the instrument will be relayed to the facility’s
220V with two power cord options and
existing nurse call system. No operating
has isolated RS-232 Board, potential
features of the instrument are changed and
equalization (PE) connector, and drop
it will alarm with or without the nurse call.
sensor board installed.
The only additional item needed is a cable
There is no Nurse Call option. with a 9-pin to mono phone jack (ALARIS
P/N 136111).
Keypads, other than English, have
symbols instead of words.
1.4.2 Learn/Teach RS-232 Cable
• SOFTWARE
This is a standard commercially available
The 7131/7231 Series has a drug list 9-pin Null Modem RS-232 cable (ALARIS
only if the software version is 4.08 or P/N 133450). The Learn/Teach RS-232
higher and profiles are enabled. Some cable is used to connect two instruments for
defaults are different in configuration the purpose of transferring (downloading)
mode and there are several languages to configuration data from/to another
choose from in version 2.78. instrument.
Refer to the applicable Signature Edition® NOTE: Guardrails® Safety Software data
GOLD Infusion System DFU for complete sets cannot be transferred via the
setup and operation information. Learn/Teach function. They must be
downloaded directly from a PC.

1-2 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 GENERAL INFORMATION

Table 1-1. Specifications

Administration Sets: Use only ALARIS Medical Systems® 72 Series administration sets. All
disposable IV set and IV set accessory models are defined on a separate
card.

Air-in-Line Accuracy: Configured Threshold Air Volume Detection Range

50µL 15µL - 85µL
100µL 35µL - 140µL
200µL 100µL - 235µL
500µL 275µL - 565µL

Alarms: • Accumulated Air in • Hold Time • Occlusion Upstream

Line Exceeded • Primary Flow
• Air in Line • Instrument Detection During
• Battery Depleted Malfunction Secondary
• Channel • Key Stuck • Set Out
Malfunction • Latch Open • Set Up Time
• Computer Link • No Upstream Flow Exceeded
Failure Detected
• Flow Sensor • Occlusion
Unplugged Downstream

Altitude: Operating Altitude: -500 ft. (-150m) to 7,500 ft. (2285m)

Battery: Rechargeable nickel-cadmium (NiCad). Use only NiCad 12V, 1.8

ampere-hour (Ah) (minimum) batteries. A single channel instrument will
operate for 4 hours nominal and a dual channel instrument will operate
for 3 hours nominal, under the following conditions:
• new, fully-charged battery
• ambient room temperature 73 ± 7°F (23 ± 4°C)
• resistance monitoring modes
• rate: 100 mL/h on a single channel instrument and 50 mL/h on each
channel of a dual channel instrument.

Battery run time is affected by operating mode, rate, monitoring options,

and back pressure.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 1-3
Technical Service Manual
GENERAL INFORMATION

Table 1-1. Specifications (Continued)

Bolus Volume Limits: Monitoring Options

Time Bolus Volume
Released Upon Correcting
Downstream Occlusion Resistance and
Pressure
(mL) High Resistance

25 600 100% 100%

Threshold Settings
mmHg mmHg 25 mmHg 600 mmHg

Maximum 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

1 mL/h
Typical <0.1 0.3 <0.1 <0.1
Maximum 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
25 mL/h
Typical <0.1 0.3 <0.1 <0.1

NOTE: When the occlusion alarm pressure limit is set to the maximum
threshold setting, the maximum infusion pressure generated into a hard
occlusion at 25 mL/h is 11.6±3.9 psi. Testing performed using IV set
Model 72003, at 68±4°F (20±2°C).

Case: Impact and flame resistant plastic.

Critical Volume: Maximum incremental volume in case of single point failure will not
exceed 1.0 mL at 999.9 mL/h.
Dimensions (Nominal): 7130/7131 7230/7231
Width 7.6 in/19.3 cm 10.7 in/26.7 cm
Height 8.6 in/21.8 cm 8.6 in/21.8 cm
Depth § 5.0 in/12.7 cm 5.0 in/12.7 cm
Weight §§ 6.6 lbs/3.0 kg 8.4 lbs/3.8 kg
Power Cord 10 ft/3 m 10 ft/3 m
§ without pole clamp
§§ without power cord

Environmental Conditions: Operating Storage/Transport

Temperature Range 5 to 40°C -40 to 60°C

(41 to 104°F) (-40 to 104°F)

Relative Humidity 20 to 90% 5 to 95%

Non-condensing Non-condensing

Atmospheric Pressure 700 to 1060 hPa 500 to 1060 hPa

Fluid Ingress Rating: Drip proof IPX1

1-4 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 GENERAL INFORMATION

Table 1-1. Specifications (Continued)

Ground Current Leakage: Electrical leakage current, enclosure: <100 microamperes
Electrical leakage current, patient: <10 microamperes
Log Capacity: Software version 2.78:
2000 Event History Log
Software version 4.06/4.08:
300 Continuous Quality Improvement (CQI)
1500 Event History Log
Maximum Infusion Pressure: 16 psi

NOTE: Testing performed per proposed standard IEC 601-2-24 using

IVAC® IV sets.

Maximum Time to Alarm:

Time to Detect Monitoring Options
Downstream Resistance and
Occlusion (minutes) Pressure
High Resistance

25 600 100% 100%

Threshold Settings
mmHg mmHg 25 mmHg 25 mmHg

Maximum 2 75 2 7
1 mL/h
Typical 0.6 30 0.6 4

Maximum 1 25 1 3
25 mL/h
Typical 0.1 1 1.0 1

NOTE: When the occlusion alarm pressure limit is set to the

maximum threshold setting, the maximum infusion pressure
generated into a hard occlusion at 25 mL/h is 11.6±3.9 psi. Testing
was performed using IV set Model 72003, at 68±4°F (20±2°C).

Memory: 4.06 and higher: Maintains infusion perimeters indefinitely until the
instrument is reprogrammed.

2.78: Interrupted secondary or advanced operating modes retain special

program settings up to 6 hours. Resistance/pressure trending
information is retained for 6 hours.

Mode of Operation: Continuous

Number of Instruments
per Pole: 3 (713X), 2 (723X), single pole, weighted base, 5 legs.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 1-5
Technical Service Manual
GENERAL INFORMATION

Table 1-1. Specifications (Continued)

Occlusion Alarm Pressure: 12 ± 4 psi maximum
Parts per mL: Precision Flow 3600 steps to deliver 1 mL Pressure Mode (rate < 50
mL/h). All other occlusion monitoring options 1150 steps to deliver 1 mL
(Cal # = 0.0) steps will vary with Cal #.
Power Requirements: 100-240 VAC, 50-60 Hz (40 W), 3-wire grounded system. Class 1 with
internal power source.

Rate Accuracy: For rates greater than 1 mL/h, up to 999.9 mL/h: ±5%, 95% of the time
with 95% confidence, under the conditions listed below.
For rates equal to or less than 1 mL/h: ±6.5%, 95% of the time with 95%
confidence, under the conditions listed below.
Infusion rate range: Head height: 24 ± 1 in.
0.1 to 999.9 mL/h (61 ± 2.5 cm)
Environment temperature: Back pressure: 0 psi.
68±8°F (20±4°C)
Test solution: distilled water Set Model: 72003
Needle: 18 gauge Minimum collection volume: 6 mL

CAUTION
Variations of head height, back pressure, time, monitoring mode option,
instrument tilt, or any combination of these, may affect rate accuracy.
Factors that can influence head height and back pressure are: IV set
configuration, IV solution viscosity and IV solution temperature. Back
pressure may also be affected by type of catheter.

Rate Range: 0.1 to 999.9 mL/h in 0.1 mL/h increments (primary)

0.1 to 270.0 mL/h in 0.1 mL/h increments (secondary)
RFI: Tolerance < 10 V/m across frequency range.
Temperature: Operating above 30°C, for extended periods will reduce battery life.
Volume to Be Infused Range: 0.1 to 9999.9 mL in 0.1 mL increments (primary and dose rate)
0.1 to 999.9 mL in 0.1 mL increments (secondary and loading dose)
0.1 to 999.9 mL per step in 0.1 mL increments (multi-step)
0.1 to 999.9 mL per dose in 0.1 mL increments (multi-dose)
WARNINGS (Alerts): • Battery Low • Load Dose Complete
• Checking Line • Multi-Step Complete
• Complete Entry • Resistance Alert
• Computer Control Released • Secondary Complete
• Dose Complete • VTBI = 0
• Infusion in KVO

NOTE: The Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System has been assessed and complies with the following
Technical Standards: IEC 60601-1 / BS 5724, including amendments A1 and A2; IEC 60601-2-24; CISPR
11, Group 1, Class B Emissions; IEC 60601-1-2.

1-6 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 GENERAL INFORMATION

1.4 ACCESSORIES (Continued) • Controls battery charger

• Provides a battery status "battery gauge"
1.4.3 Flow Sensor
• Monitors voltage and temperature of
Flow sensor capability is available with an
battery
upgrade kit for the 7130/7230 (refer to the
“Illustrated Parts Breakdown” chapter). For • Controls instrument power source (on/off
7131/7231, all that is needed is a flow function)
sensor.
• Drives Lower LCD Display
The flow sensor attaches to the (refer to Figure 1-2)
administration set's drip chamber. It detects
• Includes a relative-time clock
an empty solution container and verifies
fluid flow. When installed, it will allow VTBI The Battery Manager communicates with
to be turned off. The flow sensor will not the main processor via a serial data
see drops falling if the drip chamber is tilted channel. The main processor issues
more than 24°. commands to the Battery Manager which
then responds with status information and
1.5 ALARMS, ERRORS, MESSAGES data using this channel.
Alarm messages are displayed on the Main
1.6.1 Fan
Display. Refer to the applicable Signature
Edition® GOLD Infusion System DFU for The internal fan is used for cooling, mainly
detailed information. to help prolong battery life. It is a ball-
bearing, brushless DC fan. The fan is
1.5.1 Silencing Alarms always on when the battery is charging with
"Fast" or "Top-up" charge. The fan will go
All alarms can be temporarily silenced by
on any time battery temperature is over
pressing the Silence Key.
22°C.
1.6 BATTERY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
1.6.2 Battery and Charging Process
This section contains general information on
The battery is a ten-cell (1.2V per cell), high
the battery management system. Included
capacity nickel-cadmium type rated at
is information on how the Battery Manager
12 volts and 1.8 amp-hours (with a minimum
monitors and maintains the battery, controls
of 500 charge cycles).
the power on/off for the rest of the
instrument, and provides support functions The battery pack (10 to 18V) has a built-in
for the main processor. Refer to the temperature sensor which allows the Battery
“Principles of Operation” chapter for more Manager to monitor the temperature of the
detailed functional descriptions. battery. The pack also includes a
temperature-limiting thermostat which opens
The battery management system consists of
the circuit if the battery temperature gets too
the Battery Manager IC and various sensors
hot and closes again when the temperature
and signal processing circuits. The Battery
returns to normal.
Manager IC (Rev. 3.06) is a custom-
programmed microcontroller that performs
the following functions:

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 1-7
Technical Service Manual
GENERAL INFORMATION

1.6 BATTERY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM The charger will suspend top-up if the
(Continued) battery temperature exceeds 37°C. The
time spent to cool down to below 37°C is
1.6.2 Battery and Charging Process in addition to the 180 minutes top-up
(Continued) charge time. If top-up cool down time
The battery charge circuit charges the exceeds 5 1/2 hours, the instrument will
battery with a constant current of 1 ampere go into float charge mode.
whenever the Battery Manager turns the • Float Charge: The float charge phase
charger on. The Battery Manager regulates begins at the end of the top-up phase
average charge current by turning the and helps maintain a fully charged
charger on and off with the appropriate duty battery. This phase charges at an
ratio. The battery charge cycle consists of average rate of 40 mA (1A for 0.2
four modes; fast charge, top-up charge, float seconds every 5 seconds). The fan
charge, and hot charge. remains on or turns on when battery
• Fast Charge: Fast charge is initiated temperature exceeds 22°C.
whenever the battery is less than 36°C, • Hot Charge: The hot charge mode occurs
and has been discharged by more than when the instrument determines that the
200 Ampere-seconds through actual use battery is >36°C (normally due to
or self discharge. Leaving the instrument ambient temperature being >27°C) to
unplugged for a day would cause about allow a charge after waiting 3 hours for it
200 Ampere-seconds of self discharge. to cool down. Hot charge mode charges
The charge current is a continuous at an average rate of 180 mA (1A for 0.9
1 Ampere. The end of a fast charge is seconds every 5 seconds) for a total
detected when the temperature of the charge time of 18 hours. If the battery
battery rises 7°C above its temperature temperature exceeds 43°C, the charging
at start of charge and is at least 30°C, or is turned off until the temperature falls
when the battery voltage declines by below 43°C.
192mV below its peak value, or total
Note that the cool down time is in
charge time exceeds 3.2 hours. Refer to
addition to the 18-hour charge time. The
“Battery Charge Regulator” section in the
float charge cycle begins at the end of
“Principles of Operation” chapter for
the hot charge cycle.
further details.
• Top-Up Charge: The top-up charge 1.6.3 Refresh Cycle
phase begins at the end of the fast
A battery refresh cycle performs a full
charge phase and finishes adding the
charge, discharge, and recharge to
last few percent of charge to the battery
condition and measure the capacity of the
and balances individual cell charges.
battery. This refresh results in a new
This phase charges at an average rate of
"Measured Capacity" in the battery
180 mA (1 A for 0.9 seconds every 5
diagnostics and can be used to judge the
seconds) for 180 minutes. At that time,
condition of the battery.
the instrument will go into float charge
mode.

1-8 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 GENERAL INFORMATION

1.6 BATTERY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM Table 1-2. Battery Trip Points

(Continued)
Battery Voltage Instrument Response
1.6.3 Refresh Cycle (Continued) 12.0V (Single) • One tick mark left on gauge
The refresh cycle must be initiated 12.1V (Dual) • Instrument continues to function
manually, either by disconnecting/ • Warning tone activated
reconnecting the battery or by loading 0.0 • Low battery warning
Ah as the rated capacity in the battery
11.45V • Instrument does not pump
diagnostics page. After the zero rated
• Constant alarm
capacity is loaded and the OK soft key is • Low battery alarm (depletion)
pressed, the original rated capacity must be
reloaded to preserve the battery gauge. 10.25V • 1 minute or longer (nominal 5
The empty ("E") icon will flash during the min.) after low battery alarm
discharge part of the refresh cycle (see • Backup speaker activated
Figure 1-1). Important: The AC power must • Instrument shutdown (5 min.
remain connected and uninterrupted during after alarm)
the discharge cycle. If the AC power is 9.75V • No AC power applied
removed during this cycle, the discharge • Battery disconnected from
cycle will be terminated and another refresh circuit by shutdown signal
cycle will have to be initiated. The time for
complete refresh is dependent upon battery

Figure 1-1. Battery Refresh Cycle

Top-Up* Top-Up*
Fast Fast
Cool* Cool*

Discharge Float

11.45 Volts

Refresh cycle starts Cycle ends

“E” blinks

* Cool and Top-Up portions of cycle will vary with

temperature. The complete cycle could last 24 hours if
instrument turned on with the Fan running most of the time.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 1-9
Technical Service Manual
GENERAL INFORMATION

1.6 BATTERY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM estimate the charge available on battery

(Continued) power at the current infusion rate.

1.6.3 Refresh Cycle (Continued) NOTES:

temperature and takes an average of 20 • The instrument label and battery gauge
hours to complete (refer to Figure 1-1). are always displayed, even when the
instrument is turned off; however, the
Two ways to initiate a manual refresh cycle battery gauge does not represent the
are: battery charge remaining when the
instrument is turned off.
• Disconnect from AC, unplug battery, and
then press power switch. Lower LCD • To ensure a more accurate battery gauge
will go blank. Reconnect battery and reading, review the battery gauge five
then reconnect instrument to AC. minutes after starting an infusion. The
gauge updates for each program change
• Enter Diagnostics Mode, go to page D2, while infusing. Battery run time may be
Select Battery Status, and enter 0.0 Ah affected by the operating mode, rate,
for battery-rated capacity. Press Enter monitoring options and back pressure.
and ok. Turn instrument off and back on,
and then reconnect to AC. Once the fan 1.6.5 Power On/Off
turns on (indicating start of a refresh The Battery Manager provides the interface
cycle), return to page D2 and reset between the power on/off switch(es) and
battery rated capacity to 1.3 Ah. the main processor. When the instrument
is off, the Battery Manager interprets either
1.6.4 Battery Gauge power switch as a turn on command and
The battery gauge provides an indication of applies power to the rest of the instrument,
the approximate amount of charge informing the main processor which switch
remaining on the battery. It will usually was pressed. Once power is on, further
indicate less charge than is actually presses of a power switch are passed on to
available with a new battery. This is the main processor which determines the
displayed in a bar graph format on the appropriate response under the existing
lower LCD Display and is active as long as conditions. If the response is to turn the
the battery is connected to the instrument. power off, the main processor requests that
(Refer to Figure 1-2, Lower LCD Display the Battery Manager remove power from
Layout.) the rest of the instrument.
The battery gauge circuitry measures the If an error has been detected which causes
current flow into and out of the battery and the watchdog to be in alarm, pushing the
maintains a record of the state of charge of power switch (or for dual channel
the battery. This record is reset each time instruments, either power switch)
the instrument completes a full refresh immediately causes the power to be turned
cycle. The battery gauge uses this record, off, without intervention by the Battery
together with a measurement of the present Manager.
power requirements of the instrument, to

1-10 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 GENERAL INFORMATION

1.6 BATTERY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 1.6.8 Battery Maintenance

(Continued)
CAUTIONS
1.6.6 Lower LCD Display
• Use only batteries approved by ALARIS
The Battery Manager also contains the
Medical Systems, due to Battery
driver for the Lower LCD Display. In addition
Manager requirements and the
to the battery gauge, this display contains a
thermostat contained in the battery
four-character alphanumeric "configuration"
assembly. If the instrument has been in
display and several icons. The information
storage, connect it to AC power before
for these other displays is controlled by the
turning it on. Usually one refresh cycle
main processor and is communicated to the
is sufficient to restore battery capacity.
Battery Manager through the serial channel.
If necessary, repeat the procedure at
The Battery Manager also uses the four-
24-hour intervals, 2 or 3 times, to
character display to indicate errors detected
increase capacity.
in the Battery Manager system itself.
• Battery replacement should be
Figure 1-2. Lower LCD Display Layout performed by qualified service
personnel while instrument is not in use.
DO NOT open, incinerate or short circuit
the battery. Worn-out batteries must be

GOLD MNTR
disposed of properly, according to local
regulations.

Several features have been included in the

Battery Manager to help properly maintain
the battery.
• A battery capacity measurement is
1.6.7 Clock available in diagnostic mode.

The Battery Manager provides a "relative • A special circuit removes all load from
time" clock which the main processor can battery when voltage falls too low,
set and read. This clock consists of a 32-bit preventing damage from over discharge
counter which is incremented once a due to long-term storage.
second under all conditions. The main NiCad batteries can be stored indefinitely
processor uses this counter as a means of with no load but will self-discharge from a
determining elapsed time even when power charged state in about 100 days. This does
has been turned off. The clock is used to not damage the battery as it would if it were
compensate for normal battery capacity a lead acid-type battery. Connect
degradation over time. instrument to AC to recharge batteries.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 1-11
Technical Service Manual
GENERAL INFORMATION

1.6 BATTERY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM An ideal charge cycle starts with a fully
(Continued) discharged battery charged at C/10 (C is the
rated capacity in Ah) constant current for 15
1.6.8 Battery Maintenance (Continued) hours while at room temperature. For
instance, a 1.8Ah battery would be charged
NOTE: If under load (inside instrument), the for 15 hours at 180mA constant current with
maximum storage time would be about 130 a room temperature of 23°C.
days before electrolyte extrusion occurs past
the battery seal. The ideal discharge starts with a fully
charged battery under a C/5 constant
If the battery exhibits short run times, a
current load at room temperature,
reconditioning procedure can be used:
discharging to a cell voltage of 0.9V. The
1. Disconnect battery and AC rated capacity is then calculated as the time
2. Press On/Off switch and verify lower to discharge divided by 5. Again, a 1.8Ah
LCD goes blank. cell would be discharged at 360mA constant
current and not reach 0.9V for at least 5
3. Reconnect battery. hours. Note that a given battery type has
4. Reconnect instrument to AC. A refresh different capacities based on the load. For
cycle will be initiated. instance, a battery rated at 1.8Ah at a
360mA load may have only 1.6Ah at a
5. Repeat this procedure at 24-hour 1600mA load.
intervals, 2 or 3 times, to increase
capacity or use a battery conditioner. As can be seen from the preceding ideal
conditions, there are many conditions which
1.7 NICAD BATTERY CAPACITY can affect the battery capacity. The
INFORMATION following conditions have the most practical
impact on battery capacity delivered in this
All batteries have specific conditions under instrument.
which they are guaranteed to meet their
published specifications. Deviations from • Temperature During Charge:
these conditions typically result in a As the effective ambient temperature of
reduction of available capacity. the battery increases, the amount of
Manufacturers of NiCad batteries rate charge that the battery will accept is
capacities, usually expressed in Ah, based decreased. At an ambient temperature of
on a specified "ideal" charge and discharge 35°C, an enclosed battery will
condition, as well as the use of a "new" temporarily accept only about 90% of the
battery. Battery manufacturers do not use charge it would otherwise accept at
the calendar year for battery date codes. 23°C. Because the batteries are internal
The battery date code year starts on to the instrument case and the instrument
September 1. The first two digits of the date itself generates heat, the batteries will be
code are for the year and the last two digits exposed to temperatures above room
are for the week of the year (for example, temperature. Some of the ways the
date code 0411 = the year 2004 and the instrument limits the temperatures that
eleventh week from September 1). the battery sees include forcing air
across it (an internal fan) and turning off
the charger when the battery temperature
gets too high.

1-12 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 GENERAL INFORMATION

1.7 NICAD BATTERY CAPACITY in the first 2 hours after fast charge. The
INFORMATION (Continued) next charge phase, top-up, is designed to
finish the charge and to bring all
• Cycle Life and Aging:
individual cells to the fully charged state,
As batteries get older and go through
essentially rematching them. Refer to
many charge/discharge cycles, batteries
“Battery and Charging Process” section
"wear out," in that the chemicals and
in this chapter for “Fast Charge” and
materials used to construct the cell break
“Top-up Charge” information. If the
down. The way the instrument deals with
top–up charge is not completed, then the
this is to assume that a battery will
cell mismatch is not reduced and the
continually reduce capacity at a rate
cumulative capacity reduction occurs.
equivalent to 30% over 4 years, and
Top-up is a 3-hour charge, but the
continually reduce capacity at a rate
elapsed time to complete it may be over
equivalent to 30% per 200 full charge
5 hours, as the charger is turned on and
cycles. These calculated values are
off to keep the battery cool during that
used to reduce the displayed runtime on
time.
the battery gauge.
• Battery Alarm Voltage:
• Partial Discharge/Charge:
The battery alarm voltage is the voltage
When a battery is partially discharged,
at which the instrument stops operating
then charged for less than the full time,
and generates an alarm indicating the
differences between individual cell
instrument needs to be connected to AC
capacities result in cells completing
power. As noted in the ideal discharge
charge at different times. If the full
condition, the end of discharge is
charge sequence is not then completed,
determined by 0.9V/cell.
the cell "mismatch" becomes
progressively greater. This is viewed by Under perfect conditions, a battery of 10
the user as low apparent runtimes and cells connected in series would reach the
premature low battery warning and end of discharge at 9.0V; however, cells
alarms. are not perfectly matched so some will
reach 0.9V before others. The problem
The problem is cumulative in that the
occurs when a cell in series with other
mismatch increases for every partial
cells can go below 0.9V and actually can
cycle. The lowered capacity is not
go into cell reversal, which permanently
permanent, but may require 2-3 full
damages the particular cell. On the other
charge cycles to recover. The way the
hand, increasing the alarm voltage to
instrument deals with this is to reduce the
compensate for imperfectly matched cells
displayed runtime based on a limited
results in reduced runtimes with available
history of partial cycles.
capacity.
• Charge Rate:
The ideal charge rate requires 15 hours
to get to full charge, which is undesirable
from the user's perspective. The
instrument provides a multiphase charge
cycle which results in about 80% capacity

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 1-13
Technical Service Manual
GENERAL INFORMATION

1.7 NICAD BATTERY CAPACITY processing of the pressure and flow data
INFORMATION (Continued) can then produce the fluid impedance value.
Such measurements can be made
The user sees this as premature low
continuously at short intervals and be
battery warnings and alarms. The way
independent of the selected rate. Head
the instrument deals with this is to
height and resulting pressure variations,
increase the alarm voltage to guarantee
likewise, will not affect the measurement.
the battery is not damaged and to reduce
the assumed capacity to below that When a complete occlusion occurs, the
printed on the battery. The battery gauge resistive part of the fluid impedance is very
is intended to show the minimum run large (theoretically infinite). Elevated
time left on the battery taking all these resistances due to clotting, clogged filters,
factors into account. partial occlusions or infiltrations can be
measured.
NOTE: In the event ALARIS Medical Systems
provides different battery packs in the future, The Dynamic Monitoring® System provides
the replacement battery may have a different a means to measure the mechanical
rated capacity. Therefore, the Battery properties of the downstream flow path.
Manager of the instrument needs to know that Figure 1-3. Resistance Graph
a new battery has been added and the rated
capacity has changed. Refer to the
“Removing Battery” section of “Corrective
PRESSURE (result)

Maintenance” chapter and the “Changing

RATE HI
Rated Capacity of Battery” section of
“Troubleshooting” chapter.
SET RATE
1.8 DYNAMIC MONITORING® SYSTEM P
(DMS) RATE LOW
F
The following is general information
regarding the Dynamic Monitoring® System. F Nominal
0
In order for fluid to move through the FLOW (cause)
administration set, a pressure difference
(gradient) must exist. In a gravity setup, this
Pressure =
is done by head height. In a pump, the
Effect when a force is against a restriction.
instrument will develop pressure to
overcome downstream effects on fluid flow. Resistance =
Caused when impediment to fluid flow
The fundamental concept behind the
occurs.
Dynamic Monitoring® System is that the
resistance to fluid flow from the mechanism Resistance = Change in Pressure (∆P)
to the patient's infusion site can be Change in Flow ( ∆F)
measured. This is done by intentionally
varying the flow rate while monitoring the
resulting changes in fluid pressure (refer to Refer to Figure 1-4 "Pressure and Resistance
Figure 1-3 "Resistance Graph"). Signal Graph".

1-14 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 GENERAL INFORMATION

1.8 DYNAMIC MONITORING® SYSTEM Figure 1-4. Pressure and Resistance Graph
(DMS) (Continued)
600

PRESSURE mmHg
Features include:
• Alarm setting is based on dynamic 300
system impedance (pressure changes,
IN PRESSURE
not absolute pressure).
0 TIME
• Detection of complete occlusions.
OCCLUSION
• Reduced nuisance alarms by minimizing
artifact effects such as head height and
patient movement. 100%

mmHg/Liter/Hr
FLUID OHMS
• AutoRestartPlus feature allows 75%
IN PRESSURE
instrument to automatically continue 50%
operation if an occlusion is cleared within
self-check period (40 seconds). A
warning tone and “Checking Line” 0 TIME
message will occur for up to 40 seconds.
OCCLUSION
The feature can be turned off (set
restarts to zero), or number of restarts Pressure rise is quite small with site
may be set from 1 to 9. complication, especially with low flow rates.

NOTES: Resistance rises dramatically with site

complication.
• The restart counter is reset whenever
Run/Hold is pressed, the instrument or
channel is turned off or an alarm occurs.
• When infusion is started, the resistance
may be other than 0%, depending on
solution viscosity, catheter/tubing size and
filters.
• Resistance Alert provides an early
warning of slow or gradual changes in
resistance of IV line/site. Resistance Alert
marker can be set from 5 to 100%. It
allows resistance to be monitored and
provides a tone every 30 seconds if
percent resistance exceeds resistance
alert mark.
• Resistance display may be turned off. If
off, system continues to monitor
downstream resistance and alarm
appropriately.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 1-15
Technical Service Manual
GENERAL INFORMATION

1.9 DATA COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION

The instrument has built-in remote
monitoring capability. This allows features
and their data to be monitored by a
computer, providing a means to create
advanced clinical systems. A separate
manual on data communications is available
and organized to support technical
personnel with a wide range of experience
and needs. The separate manual includes:
• General Information: Includes phone
number for technical support.
• Operation: Instrument's communications
modes, controls, indicators, and
procedures from user's point of view.
• Instrument Setup: How to set the baud
rate, enable or disable computer
monitoring, and other parameters.
• Electrical Interfacing: RS-232
background information, connectors and
recommended wiring for common
computers.
• Communications Protocol: Inquiry,
response, and command codes, data
formats, message sequences, and error
detection.

1.10 TRUMPET AND START-UP CURVES

Refer to the applicable Signature Edition®
GOLD Infusion System DFU.

1-16 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 GENERAL INFORMATION

Table 1-3. Abbreviations, Acronyms, Symbols

Various abbreviations, acronyms and symbols are used throughout this manual. The following are those that are
not commonly known or easily recognized.

* "active Low" logic signal VAO voltage alternating oscillator

AlL air-in-line VBKUP voltage backup

DFU directions for use VNEG negative voltage

DS display VMEAS voltage measured

ECD empty container detection VMOTOR voltage to motor

F fuse VPOS positive voltage

FB ferrite bead VRAW voltage raw (unregulated voltage)

H hexadecimal VTBI volume to be infused

KVO keep vein open VTHRES voltage threashold

PM preventive maintenance WD watchdog

PR power regulator WDI watchdog input

PRI/SEC primary to secondary WDO watchdog output

SCU serial control unit

Signature Edition® GOLD, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 1-17

Technical Service Manual
GENERAL INFORMATION

T H I S PA G E
I N T E N T I O N A L LY
LEFT BLANK

1-18 Signature Edition® GOLD, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

Technical Service Manual
2A CHECKOUT & CONFIGURATION
 CHAPTER 2A — CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Versions 4.06 and 4.08

CAUTION
Keep latch closed when instrument is not in use.
2.1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the initial setup and
configuration of an instrument with software
versions 4.06 and 4.08.
CAUTION
2.2 NEW INSTRUMENT CHECKOUT
Should an instrument be jarred severely or
dropped, remove it from use immediately. It Refer to the instrument's Directions For Use
should be thoroughly tested and inspected by (DFU) for instructions regarding unpacking
qualified service personnel to ensure proper and setting up the instrument for the first
function prior to reuse. time.
When turning on the instrument, verify the
instrument beeps and that all display LED
segments flash. This confirms that the
instrument has performed its self test and is
operating correctly. During operation, the
instrument continually performs a self test,
and will alarm and display a message if it
detects an internal malfunction.
Contact ALARIS Medical Systems
authorized service personnel if the
instrument has physical damage, fails to
satisfactorily pass startup sequence, fails a
self test or continues to alarm.
For new instrument checkout refer to the
applicable Signature Edition® GOLD
Infusion System DFU.

2.3 CONFIGURABLE OPTIONS AND

DEFAULTS
A hospital/facility biomedical technician has
the capability to set all configuration
parameters to their startup defaults in a
single operation. The terms "configuration
parameters" and "programmable features"
are interchangeable and have the same
meaning. Refer to the applicable Signature
Edition® GOLD Infusion System DFU for
more information.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 2A-1
Technical Service Manual
CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Versions 4.06 and 4.08

2.4 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE and Optional Features, because the

Guardrails® Safety Software profile
overrides every other setting in the
WARNINGS
configuration mode.
• When an instrument’s configuration is
changed, the configuration name NOTES:
should also be changed in order to
• Pressing a soft key at the side of the Main
document the new parameter settings. Display the first time, selects it for editing.
The intent of the configuration name is Some features are edited by subsequent
to have only one set of parameters for presses of the soft key to cycle through
each alpha-numeric code. Refer to available options. Other features are
“Pop-Up Displays” section. edited by means of the numeric keypad
entry.
• Powering down in configuration mode
during an alarm or error will NOT save • Pressing undo undoes any edits made to
any configuration changes. that page, and stays on the page.
• Pressing ok accepts all information on the
page, and returns to menu page.
The configuration procedure is for use by • Pressing the POWER switch after editing
qualified service personnel only. The a configurable item evokes an invalid key
configuration mode is intended for tone and a message to "ok entry". ok
programming the technical and clinical must be selected to accept the edit before
features in accordance with current the instrument can be powered off.
procedures and practices. • The page number is located in the upper-
Table 2-1, “Record of Configured right corner of the display.
Instruments”, can be reproduced and used
to record and track instrument CAUTION
configuration settings. The instrument’s configuration information
A map of all the configuration screens is is not lost when disconnected from AC
located at the end of this chapter (Figure power. However, error history and infusion
2-1). program settings may be lost. If this
information is to be saved, be sure to record
Software version 2.78 is not Guardrails® it before disconnecting power.
Safety Software compatible and the
configuration mode is different. Refer to
Chapter 2 for “Software Version 2.78” for
detailed calibration information.
The configuration mode for versions 4.06
and 4.08 are identical except when
Profiles is enabled. When Profiles is
enabled, the only configuration settings
that can be changed in version 4.08 are
Regional Settings, Profiles, Computer Link

2A-2 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Versions 4.06 and 4.08

2.4 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE 2.4.2 Setting to Defaults

(Continued)
The Set To Defaults mode programs all
configuration items to their default values.
2.4.1 Entering Configuration Mode
The instrument must be off (both channels CAUTION
must be off for dual channel). It is strongly recommended that the
The procedure for the single and dual Configurable Options be reviewed for a
channel is the same. Any configuration in complete list of defaults before using this
the dual channel sets the same value for feature.
both channels.
1. Advance to C2 page.
1. Press and hold left-bottom display soft
key.
A B OPTIONS
2. Press POWER switch. Continue to press
display soft key until configuration mode Set To Defaults C
display appears, then release. Regional Settings 2
Air In Line
Page C1 of configuration mode is
Profiles
displayed. This is a read-only display.
page

A B OPTIONS

CONFIGURATION MODE C 2. Press Set to Defaults soft key.

ID No. : 001234567 1
SW Rev.: 04.08
Config.: 2D15 GOLD A B OPTIONS

page Set all C

Configuration 2
items to their
default values
3. Press page to advance to page to be
configured. cancel ok

NOTE: For 7131/7231, the default code

will be 5B44 for instruments set to factory
defaults (instead of 2D15).
3. Press ok to accept change and return to
beginning of C2 page. Pressing cancel
leaves all items set to their previous
values and returns to beginning of C2
page.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 2A-3
Technical Service Manual
CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Versions 4.06 and 4.08

2.4 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE NOTES:

(Continued)
• If there is no tick mark next to
2.4.3 Regional Settings Language, English is the only option.
• Instruments configured in European
A B OPTIONS Regional Settings (with profiles OFF)
do not have a drug list. When Dose
Set To Defaults C Rate Calculator is chosen (from
Regional Settings 2 OPTIONS menu), followed by Enter
Air In Line New Program, the instrument defaults
Profiles to generic drug dose rate calculation.

page 4. Press ok to accept change and return to

beginning of C2 page.

2.4.4 Setting Air-in-Line Threshold

1. From C2 page, press Regional Settings The air-in-line threshold sets the bubble size
soft key. sensitivity. The air-in-line reset allows the
clinician to respond to an AIR IN LINE
2. Press Region soft key to select for
alarm, assess its clinical significance, and
editing. Press again to cycle through
choose whether or not to continue the
region choices (N. America, European).
infusion without removing the air. The reset
feature allows only the current bubble to
A B OPTIONS
proceed without tripping an alarm. The air
Regional Settings C in line threshold value choices are 50, 100,
Region= N. America 2 200 and 500 microliters.
Language= English The Accumulator setting, when on, looks for
10% to 15% of the downstream path to be
undo ok air before giving an ACCUMULATED AIR
IN LINE alarm. The amount of air that
causes the alarm will vary with the threshold
setting and rate.
An AIR IN LINE alarm is the result of the
bubble size exceeding the Threshold
3. Press Language soft key to select for setting. An ACCUMULATED AIR IN LINE
editing. Press again to cycle through alarm is the result when 10 to 15% of the
language choices . downstream path is filled with air, exceeding
the accepted level looked for when the
Accumulator is set to On.

2A-4 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Versions 4.06 and 4.08

2.4 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE 2.4.5 Profiles

(Continued)

2.4.4 Setting Air-in-Line Threshold A B OPTIONS

(Continued)
Set To Defaults C
1. From C2 page, press Air In Line soft Regional Settings 2
key. Air In Line
Profiles
A B OPTIONS
page
Set To Defaults C
Regional Settings 2
Air In Line
Profiles 1. From C2 page, press Profiles soft key.

page
A B OPTIONS

Profiles C
Off 2
2. Press Threshold soft key to select for
editing. Press again to cycle through 50
mcL, 100 mcL, 200 mcL and 500 mcL.
undo ok
NOTE: Use a 50 microliters setting on
microbore tubing. The other three settings
may be used on macrobore tubing.
2. Press Off or On soft key to select for
A B OPTIONS
editing. Press again to cycle between
Air In Line C On and Off.
Threshold= 100 mcL 2 NOTES:
Reset= Off
Accumulator= On • The data set for Guardrails® Safety
Software must be loaded to set Profiles
undo ok to On. For the Guardrails® Safety
Software to function, Profiles and Dose
Rate must be On.
3. Press Reset soft key to select for editing. • When Profiles is turned on, the
Press again to cycle between On and configuration mode will have limited
Off. access. Access will be limited to
Regional Settings, Profiles, Computer
4. Press Accumulator soft key to select for Link and Optional Features, due to the
editing. Press again to cycle between data set overriding the configuration
On and Off. settings as part of the Guardrails®
5. Press ok to accept change and return to Safety Software.
beginning of C2 page.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 2A-5
Technical Service Manual
CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Versions 4.06 and 4.08

2.4 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE 4. Use numeric keypad to enter maximum

(Continued) rate. Press Enter.

2.4.6 Setting Maximum Rate 1 2 3

This sets the maximum selectable rate. The 4 5 6
range for Maximum Rate is 0.1 to 7 8 9
999.9 mL/h. . 0 Clear Enter

NOTES:
• The maximum rate setting applies to all 5. Press ok to accept change and return to
infusion modes. beginning of C3 page.
• Setting the Maximum Rate below the
2.4.7 Setting Computer Link
preset KVO Rate will lower the KVO Rate.
The KVO Rate will not exceed the The Computer Link feature allows a
Maximum Rate. hospital/facility computer to interact with the
instrument and programs the level of
1. Advance to C3 page. computer control available. If the feature is
off, the computer cannot communicate with
the instrument.
A B OPTIONS
Monitor Mode allows computer to only
Maximum Rate C receive information from instrument.
Computer Link 3 Enabling of monitoring mode automatically
Optional Modes places it in options menu.
Optional Features
Off Mode does not allow any
page communication between instrument and a
computer.

A B OPTIONS

2. Press Maximum Rate soft key. Maximum Rate C

Computer Link 3
Optional Modes
A B OPTIONS
Optional Features
Maximum Rate = C page
999.9 mL/hr 3

ok 1. On C3 page, press Computer Link soft

key.

3. Press the soft key to select the value for

editing.

2A-6 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Versions 4.06 and 4.08

2.4 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE Universal Rate: If the DRC mode is

(Continued) discontinued, the instrument's primary
setting will now be the same as the last rate
2.4.7 Setting Computer Link (Continued) and VTBI used in the DRC mode.

A B OPTIONS NOTES:
• Dose Rate must be on in order to use
Mode = Mntr Off C Guardrails® Safety Software drug selection
Baud Rate = 9600 3 capability.
Parity = Even
• Instruments configured in European
Regional Settings (with profiles OFF) do
undo ok not have a drug list. When Dose Rate
Calculator is chosen (from OPTIONS
menu), followed by Enter New Program,
the instrument defaults to generic drug
2. Press Mode soft key to select for editing. dose rate calculation.
Press again to cycle through Off and
Mntr.
A B OPTIONS

3. Press Baud Rate soft key to select for

editing. Press again to cycle through
Maximum Rate C
Computer Link 3
choices (300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2400,
Optional Modes
4800 and 9600).
Optional Features
4. Press Parity soft key to select for editing.
page
Press again to cycle through Even, Odd,
and None.
5. Press ok to accept changes and return
to beginning of C3 page.
1. On C3 page, press Optional Modes soft
2.4.8 Setting Optional Modes key.
The Optional Modes feature allows the 2. Press Loading Dose soft key to select
options menu to be configured to how it will for editing. Press again to cycle between
appear in normal mode. Enabling of these On and Off.
modes will automatically place them in the
option menu. NOTE: This feature allows an initial
infusion rate to be set up for a specific
When Loading Dose, Multi-Step, and volume, automatically followed by a
Multi-Dose are on, they appear in the menu maintenance rate from the same
when options key is pressed in normal container.
mode.
For Dose Rate to appear in the options
menu, it must be turned on.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 2A-7
Technical Service Manual
CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Versions 4.06 and 4.08

2.4 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE 2.4.9 Setting Optional Features

(Continued)
The Panel Lock feature allows the front
panel to be locked and unlocked to help
2.4.8 Setting Optional Modes (Continued)
prevent tampering.

3. Press Dose Rate soft key to select for When VTBI (volume to be infused) is on, a
editing. Press again to cycle between On volume to be infused must be entered;
and Off. otherwise, the last remaining VTBI or last
entered VTBI, depending on the channel's
NOTE: This feature allows dose last usage, will be in effect. When VTBI is
parameters to be programmed so that the off, there is no VTBI line capability.
instrument then calculates the volumetric
When the Multi-Dose Alert feature is on, the
rate.
option is available to set an alert at the end
4. Press Multi-Step soft key to select for of every dose when in the Multi-Dose mode.
editing. Press again to cycle between On
and Off.
A B OPTIONS

NOTE: This feature allows a sequential Maximum Rate C

program to deliver up to nine steps; fluid Computer Link
volumes and delivery rates may be
3
Optional Modes
programmed for each step.
Optional Features
5. Press Multi-Dose soft key to select for
editing. Press again to cycle between On page
and Off.

NOTE: This feature allows multiple

infusions to be programmed over a period
of up to 24 hours; the fluid volume and 1. On C3 page, press Optional Features
delivery rate is repeated for each delivery. soft key.

A B OPTIONS A B OPTIONS

Loading Dose On C Panel Lock= On C

Dose Rate= On 3 VTBI= On 3
Multi-Step= Off Multi-Dose Alert=Off
Multi-Dose= Off
undo ok undo ok

6. Press ok to accept changes and return 2. Press Panel Lock soft key to select for
to beginning of C3 page. editing. Press again to cycle between
On and Off.

2A-8 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Versions 4.06 and 4.08

2.4 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE

(Continued)
A B OPTIONS

KVO Rate = C
2.4.9 Setting Optional Features (Continued) 5.0 mL/hr 4
3. Verify VTBI is On.

NOTE: The flow sensor option (empty

undo ok
container detector) needs to be installed to
be able to turn VTBI off.

4. Press Multi-Dose Alert soft key to select 3. Press soft key next to rate value once to
for editing. Press again to cycle between select for editing.
On and Off.
5. Press ok to accept changes and return to 1 2 3
beginning of C3 page. 4 5 6
7 8 9
2.4.10 Setting KVO Rate
. 0 Clear Enter

The instrument will automatically operate at

the KVO rate (or current rate, whichever is
less) once the primary VTBI has counted 4. Use numeric keypad to enter KVO rate.
down to zero. The KVO rate range is 0.1 to Press Enter.
20.0 mL/h.
1. Advance to C4 page. A B OPTIONS

A B OPTIONS KVO Rate = C

1.0 mL/hr 4
KVO Rate C
Monitoring Options 4
Audio
undo ok
Configuration Name
page

5. Press ok to accept change and return to

beginning of C4 page.
2. Press KVO Rate soft key.
NOTE: The KVO Rate will NOT exceed
the present Maximum Rate.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 2A-9
Technical Service Manual
CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Versions 4.06 and 4.08

2.4 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE • Monitoring Options: To select IV

(Continued) line/site monitoring modes of resistance,
high resistance, and adjustable pressure.
2.4.11 Setting Dynamic Monitoring® System
Pressure: Highest occlusion method,
Features
when set to a default of 600 mmHg,
The Signature Edition® Infusion System when Resistance and High Resistance
incorporates the Dynamic Monitoring® modes are not sufficient.
System, a versatile intravenous site
Resistance: Designed to monitor IV
monitoring system for detection of both full
line/site resistance, providing optimum
and partial occlusions of the fluid pathway.
sensitivity. Used for larger catheter sizes
This system includes both precision (up to 24 gauge).
pressure sensing and continuously
High Resistance: Designed to monitor
computed Flow Resistance.
IV line/site resistance, with optimum
Flow Resistance measurement dramatically sensitivity where smaller (higher
improves the ability to detect partial and full resistance) catheters (26 or 28 gauge)
occlusions, particularly at low flow rates. are used.
Resistance monitoring eliminates the impact AutoRestartPlus
of patient elevation and flow rate, to provide
the most direct assessment of patient. The AutoRestartPlus feature provides the
ability to automatically continue an infusion
Both the Pressure and Flow Resistance if downstream resistance or pressure
monitoring modes feature numeric and bar measurements indicate that an occlusion
graph displays of current values plus easily condition has cleared with a 40-second
selectable trend graphs, displaying up to Checking Line period (excluding High
twelve hours of monitored values. Resistance monitoring mode). If the
The Pressure Mode provides 1 mmHg condition is not cleared, the OCCLUSION
display resolution, with manual baseline DOWNSTREAM alarm occurs and infusion
setting, and a user-adjustable alarm limit. is stopped until manually restarted.

The Resistance Mode provides two ranges The Checking Line message and tone are
and user-alert limit adjustment, to meet presented whenever a resistance or
neonatal to adult patient needs. pressure measurement exceeds its alarm
threshold.
Many monitoring features and functions are
configurable, by qualified technical • In resistance monitoring modes, the
personnel, to meet specific needs by Checking Line period is caused by a
allowing customization. measured resistance of 100% or a
pressure level exceeding a configured
Monitoring Mode Options threshold. This pressure threshold is
IV lines, catheters, and applications create separate from the Pressure mode
various levels of resistance to flow. threshold.
Monitoring mode options are available to
meet each clinical application, as follows:

2A-10 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Versions 4.06 and 4.08

2.4 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE NOTE: The restart counter is reset whenever

(continued) RUN/HOLD is pressed, the instrument or
channel is turned off or an alarm occurs.
2.4.11 Setting Dynamic Monitoring® System
Features (Continued) Trend Graphs

If resistance measurements initiate the Trend graphs display downstream pressure

Checking Line condition, the channel or flow resistance over time (up to 12
will continue infusing in order to hours).
determine if the measured flow In Pressure, Resistance, and High
resistance has changed. In Resistance Resistance monitoring modes, the trend
monitoring mode, if the measured flow graph displays the flow pattern over time.
resistance falls to any value below 100%, Downstream occlusions, which occur in the
the channel will resume normal operating
conditions automatically (excluding High Pressure or Resistance modes, will be
Resistance monitoring mode). indicated by a vertical tick mark at the top of
the trend screen.
In resistance monitoring modes, pressure
measurements initiate the Checking Trend graphs of fifteen minutes, one hour,
Line period when the pressure exceeds four hours and twelve hours are available
the limit. If the pressure falls to less than during normal operation.
one third of the configured limit with 40
seconds, normal flow resumes. A B OPTIONS

• In pressure monitoring mode, the KVO Rate C

Checking Line period is caused by Monitoring Options 4
pressure exceeding the alarm limit. If the Audio
pressure falls to less than one third of the Configuration Name
alarm limit within 40 seconds, normal page
flow resumes.
Qualified service personnel can turn off this
feature (set restarts to zero), or program
from 1 to 9 restarts.
1. On C4 page, press Monitoring Options
• In High Resistance monitoring mode, soft key.
restarts do not occur for resistance
measurements. A B OPTIONS

After the programmed number of restarts C

has occurred, the channel will immediately Mode= Pressure 4
alarm OCCLUSION DOWNSTREAM, if Restarts= 3
pressure or flow resistance conditions Trends= On
indicate an occlusion. The programmed
number of restarts become available again Undo ok
when RUN/HOLD or the run soft key is
pressed.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 2A-11
Technical Service Manual
CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Versions 4.06 and 4.08

2.4 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE 6. Precision Flow: Selecting Pressure

(Continued) Mode and running below 50 mL/h will
place instrument into Precision Flow
2.4.11 Setting Dynamic Monitoring® System Mode.
Features (Continued)
Precision Flow addresses both flow
2. Press Mode soft key to select for editing. resolution (parts or pulses per mL) and
Press again to cycle between Hi Resist, flow continuity (time between pulses).
Resist and Pressure. The instrument will divide each mL into
3600 parts and equally space these parts
1 2 3 into a virtually continuous delivery. With
4 5 6
Precision Flow, the longest time between
a part/pulse at 0.1 mL/h is 10 seconds.
7 8 9
As the rate increases, this time will
. 0 Clear Enter become shorter.

NOTE: Resistance measurement is

3. Press Restarts soft key. Use numeric restarted at 0% when:
keypad to enter number of restarts, from
"0" (which turns feature off) to "9", then • RUN/HOLD is pressed to put on hold
press Enter. and again to start.
• Dose ends in Multi-Dose mode.
4. Press Trends soft key to select for
editing. Press again to cycle between • Checking Line message appears.
On and Off.
• In Pressure mode, graph displays in Checking Line alert applies to pressure,
mmHg. resistance and upstream occlusion, with
one tone at the beginning and a flashing
• Trend data is lost when: popup display (on for 4 seconds, off for
♦ graph information is cleared 6 seconds).
♦ instrument is off for more than
12 hours 2.4.12 Setting Audio Volume
• Trend data is maintained when: The volume settings determine which range
of audio volume is available. For example,
♦ rate is changed "Low" may be too low, therefore "Med Hi"
♦ battery is depleted would be chosen. A transition tone, if
• Trend data is scaled (by 3 times or enabled, will sound upon completion of a
1/3, as applicable) when cycling secondary VTBI, step in multi-step mode,
between Resistance and Hi dose beginning and ending in multi-dose
Resistance modes. mode, and completion of a loading dose in
loading-dose mode.
5. Press ok to accept changes and return to
beginning of C4 page. The speaker volumes are approximately:
Low = 60 dB, Med = 65 dB, and Hi = 70 dB
at one meter.

2A-12 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Versions 4.06 and 4.08

2.4 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE 2.4.13 Setting Configuration Name

(Continued) (Instrument ID Label)
The characters entered here will be shown
2.4.12 Setting Audio Volume (Continued)
in the lower LCD display. This electronic
label is normally displayed, even when the
instrument is off.
A B OPTIONS

The configuration name can be used to

KVO Rate C uniquely identify the instrument's
Monitoring Options 4 configuration, facility location, or reference
Audio
number. It is a 4-character alpha-numeric
Configuration Name name; for example, PICU (Pediatric
page Intensive Care Unit), ICU (Intensive Care
Unit), or 2400.

NOTE: A 4-digit alpha-numeric code can be

seen next to the configuration name upon
1. On C4 menu, press Audio soft key. entering Configuration Mode (refer to
“Entering Configuration Mode” section in this
A B OPTIONS chapter). This code is only a hexadecimal
reflection of the instrument’s configuration.
Audio C
Volumes= Low Med Hi 4
Trans. Tones= On
A B OPTIONS

KVO Rate C
Undo ok Monitoring Options 4
Audio
Configuration Name

2. Press Volumes soft key to select for page

editing. Press again to cycle between
Low, Med, Hi, Med Hi, or Hi.
3. Press Trans. Tone soft key to select for
editing. Press again to cycle between On 1. On C4 menu, press Configuration
and Off. Name soft key.

4. Press ok to accept changes and return to

beginning of C4 page.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 2A-13
Technical Service Manual
CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Versions 4.06 and 4.08

2.4 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE 2.4.14 Resistance Options

(Continued)
Resistance Display: Provides a bar graph
and indication of resistance in the line while
2.4.13 Setting Configuration Name
monitoring a single channel.
(Instrument ID Label) (Continued)
2. Press Config. Name soft key to position Resistance Alert: Provides an early
highlight on character to be changed. warning of increases in downstream flow
resistance by allowing the level to be
A B OPTIONS adjusted in 5% increments during operation.

Config. Name= GOLD C Default Alert: Provides a starting point for

A B C D E F G H IJ K L M 4 occlusion detection if a different level has
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ not been chosen. The selected level will
0123456789_ remain in effect while the instrument is on,
until another option is selected from the
undo enter ok Monitoring Options page.
Alarm: Provides the option to lower the
pressure occlusion setting that is still active,
even in resistance modes.
3. Press character soft keys aligned with
rows A to M, N to Z or O to "_" to A B OPTIONS

highlight needed character.

Resistance Options C
4. Press Enter. Up to 4 characters can be Pressure Options 5
programmed in this way. Repeat steps 2, Manual Baseline
3, 4 as necessary.
5. Press ok to accept changes and return page
to beginning of C4 page.

NOTES:
• If the configuration has been changed
but not the name, the instrument will 1. Advance to C5 page.
display the option to rename before 2. Press Resistance Options soft key.
turning off or proceeding to the Teach
Mode. Refer to “Pop-Up Displays”
section for further explanation.
A B OPTIONS

• There must be 4 characters in the Resist Display= On C

configuration name. Use the space Resist Alert = On 5
symbol ( _ ) to fill in any open Default Alert = 100%
characters. Alarm = 600 mmHg
undo ok

2A-14 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Versions 4.06 and 4.08

2.4 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE 2.4.15 Pressure Options

(Continued)
Pressure Display: Provides a bar graph
and indication of pressure in the line while
2.4.14 Resistance Options (Continued)
monitoring a single channel.
3. Press Resist Display soft key to select
for editing. Press again to cycle between Pressure Alarm: Allows the choice of a
On and Off. fixed pressure mode or an adjustable
pressure mode.
NOTE: Setting Resist Display to Off will • Adjustable Pressure: Provides an early
clear Default Alert from the screen and
warning of increases in downstream
change Resist Alert to Off.
pressure. Designed to monitor IV
4. Press Resist Alert soft key to select for line/site based on pressure, and provide
editing. Press again to cycle between user-adjustable pressure alarm limits.
On and Off. Used for the smallest of catheter sizes
and special applications; such as,
NOTES: infusion through transducers, into dialysis
systems, and for the highest resistance
• Setting Resist Alert to Off will clear
catheters (including some neonatal PICC
Default Alert from the screen.
catheters).
• Resistance alert will give an alarm tone
every thirty seconds, with a popup • Fixed Pressure: Designed to monitor IV
display (on for 4 seconds, off for 6 line/site pressure and alarm, based on a
seconds). This occurs when the fixed pressure limit of 600 mmHg. Used
resistance measurement is above the when adjustable pressure is not wanted.
alert threshold or at 100%, even when Used for the smallest of catheter sizes
checking the line. If the display is off, and special applications; such as,
the alert feature will automatically be infusion through transducers, into dialysis
turned off. systems, and for the highest resistance
5. Press Default Alert soft key to select for catheters (including some neonatal PICC
editing. Enter a number using keypad, catheters).
then press Enter. Instrument will round Maximum Pressure: Provides the
up or down to nearest 5% increment. maximum pressure alarm limit if the
Pressure Alarm mode is set to Adjustable.
NOTE: To set the Default Alert level,
Any value between 25 mmHg and 600
both Resist Display and Resist Alert
mmHg (in increments of 25 mmHg)
need to be On.
inclusively can be entered.
6. Press Alarm soft key to select for editing.
Enter a number using keypad, then press If Max Press is set to a value less than Def
Enter. Alarm, the Def Alarm threshold will
automatically be set to the Max Press value
7. Press ok to accept change and return to and Default Alarm Must Be Less Than or
beginning of C5 page. Equal to XXX mmHg (which is Max Press
level) will be displayed.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 2A-15
Technical Service Manual
CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Versions 4.06 and 4.08

2.4 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE 4. Press Pressure Alarm soft key to select

(Continued) for editing. Press again to cycle between
Adj and Fix.
2.4.15 Pressure Options (Continued)
5. Press Max Press soft key to select for
Default Alarm: Provides an adjustable editing. Enter a number using keypad,
pressure setting in 25 mmHg increments then press Enter. Instrument will round
(25-600 range). This value can not exceed up or down to nearest
the Maximum Pressure that was set above. 25 mmHg increment.
If an attempt is made to enter a Def Alarm
6. Press Def Alarm soft key to select for
value greater than Max Press, the entry will
editing. Enter a number using keypad,
be rejected with a popup screen and an
then press Enter. Instrument will round
audible tone.
up or down to nearest
In addition, the Def Alarm edit field will be 25 mmHg increment.
highlighted and set to the Max Press value.
Pressure Alarm = Adj must be selected to NOTE: Enter the Def Alarm value that is
change from 600 mmHg. less than or equal to the Max Press value.

1. Advance to C5 page. 7. Press ok to accept change and return to

beginning of C5 page.
A B OPTIONS

2.4.16 Manual Baseline

Resistance Options C
Pressure Options 5 Auto Baseline: The instrument reads a
Manual Baseline baseline at startup and then adds the alarm
limit, to determine the point of alarm.

page For example, if an alarm limit of

300 mmHg was selected, the instrument
would alarm at baseline + 300 mmHg. Auto
Zeroing occurs the first time RUN/HOLD is
2. Press Pressure Options soft key. pressed; this will be the maximum baseline.
Subsequent presses of RUN/HOLD will only
A B OPTIONS lower (not raise) the baseline.

Pressure Dsply= On C Manual Baseline: Sets a fixed baseline and

Pressure Alarm= Adj 5 overrides the Auto Zero level until the
Max Press= 600 mmHg instrument is turned off, the latch is opened,
Def Alarm= 600 mmHg the set is reloaded, or the pressure baseline
function is performed again. This allows the
undo ok instrument to display the actual pressure
required for an IV to infuse. To get this real
time readout, Manual Baseline must be
3. Press Pressure Dsply soft key to select On.
for editing. Press again to cycle between
On and Off.

2A-16 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Versions 4.06 and 4.08

2.4 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE 2.5 TRANSFERRING SETTINGS TO

(Continued) ANOTHER INSTRUMENT
Once an instrument has been programmed
2.4.16 Manual Baseline (Continued)
to meet technical and clinical needs, the
To activate this mode with the instrument on settings can be transferred to other
hold, or at startup, press the OPTIONS key instruments. The programmed instrument is
and then select Set Pressure Baseline and referred to as the "Teacher" and the other
press ok. instrument is referred to as the "Learner".
When RUN/HOLD is pressed, the bar graph
NOTE: Only the configuration settings will be
will show the alarm point with a tic mark on transferred. The instrument ID number,
the bar graph, and the actual pressure in the periodic maintenance settings and other
line will be displayed below the bar graph. settings from the diagnostics mode will not be
transferred. The Guardrails® Safety Software
A B OPTIONS data sets will NOT be transferred.
Resistance Options C Connect a standard 9-pin Null Modem
Pressure Options 5 RS-232 cable (ALARIS P/N 133450) to the
Manual Baseline RS-232 ports on the instruments.

NOTE: Instrument software versions 4.06

page and 4.08 use same "Rev.01.24" and can be
used to learn/teach one instrument to the
next.

1. Advance to C5 page
2. Press Manual Baseline soft key to select
for editing.

A B OPTIONS

Manual Baseline= C
C
On 5

undo ok

3. Press On or Off soft key to cycle

between On and Off.
4. Press ok to accept change and return to
beginning of C5 page.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 2A-17
Technical Service Manual
CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Versions 4.06 and 4.08

2.5 TRANSFERRING SETTINGS TO Downloading displays until transfer is

ANOTHER INSTRUMENT (Continued) complete, and then display indicates if
transfer was successful or unsuccessful.
2.5.1 Learn/Teach Instrument Procedure
NOTES:
NOTE: The Learn/Teach function will not
• Repeat allows the operator to reattempt
work if the version level for Learn/Teach is
teaching the current instrument or to teach
not the same on both instruments. It is not
the next instrument.
recommended to Learn/Teach different
model families; such as, using a Model • Reattach the cover, and/or cover and
7130/7230 to Learn/Teach a Model screws, over the RS-232 port after
7131/7231. disconnecting the cable.
1. Access Configuration Mode for both • When the profile/data sets are used they
"teacher" and "learner" instruments and will override (replace) the selection in the
advance to C6 page. Configuration Mode. Learn/Teach will
need to be done after the profile/data set
A B OPTIONS is loaded to ensure proper use (Profiles
On).
Learn: Rev. 01.24 C • Learn/Teach can be used for transferring
Teach: Rev. 01.24 6 the Configuration Mode settings, but not
the Guardrails® Safety Software data set
(flashed from computer only).
page When a Learn/Teach operation is
unsuccessful due to incompatible versions,
the “teacher” or “learner” instrument will
display the message "Learn/Teach Failed
2. Press Teach soft key of "teacher"
Software Mismatch".
instrument and Press Learn soft key of
"learner" instrument.
A B OPTIONS
A B OPTIONS

Teach Status C
Teach Status C
6
6 Learn/Teach Failed
Awaiting Start Software Mismatch
2D15 GOLD
cancel repeat
cancel start

3. Press start soft key of "teacher"

instrument.

2A-18 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Versions 4.06 and 4.08

2.5.2 Pop-Up Displays

The pop-up screens appear when an
attempt is made to turn off an instrument or
execute the teach mode after changing the
configuration (or accessing a configured
item), but not changing the configuration
name. If the instrument's configuration is
changed and not the configuration name,
instruments with the same name may have
different configurations. The pop-up menus
ask if the configuration should be renamed.

A B OPTIONS

Configuration has C
been changed
Press POWER key
to keep name GOLD
cancel rename

A B OPTIONS

Configuration has C
been changed
Press teach key
to keep name GOLD
cancel teach rename

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 2A-19
Technical Service Manual
CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Versions 4.06 and 4.08

Table 2-1. Record of Configured Instruments

#1 #2 #3 #4 #5
§ Instrument ID/Serial #

Config Name
(Instr Label)

Location

Regional Settings

Air-In-Line:

Threshold µl µl µl µl µl
Reset
Accumulator

Profiles

Dose Rate Calculator Generic Dose Rate Calculator only

Maximum Rate mL/h mL/h mL/h mL/h mL/h mL/h

Computer Link:

Mode
Baud Rate
Parity

Optional Modes:

Loading Dose
Dose Rate
Multi-Step
Multi-Dose

Optional Features

Panel Lock
VTBI
Multi-Dose Alert

KVO Rate mL/h mL/h mL/h mL/h mL/h mL/h

--- Table Continued on Next Page ---

2A-20 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Versions 4.06 and 4.08

Table 2-1. Record of Configured Instruments (Continued)

#1 #2 #3 #4 #5

Monitoring Options:

Mode
Restarts
Trends

Audio:

Volume
Trans. Tone

Resistance Options:

Resist Display
Resist Alarm
Default Alarm % % % % %
Alarm mmHg mmHg mmHg mmHg mmHg

Pressure Options:

Pressure Display
Pressure Alarm
Maximum Pressure mmHg mmHg mmHg mmHg mmHg
Default Alarm mmHg mmHg mmHg mmHg mmHg

Manual Baseline

§Instrument ID/Serial # is accessed through Diagnostic Mode. Refer to the “Entering Diagnostic
Mode” section in the “Troubleshooting” chapter.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 2A-21
Technical Service Manual
CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Versions 4.06 and 4.08

Figure 2-1. Map of Configuration Screens

A B OPTIONS A B OPTIONS

CONFIGURATION MODE C Air In Line C

ID No. : 001234567 1 Threshold= 100 mcL 2
SW Rev.: 04.08 Reset= Off
Config.: 2D15 GOLD Accumulator= On

page undo ok

A B OPTIONS A B OPTIONS

Set To Defaults C Profiles C

Regional Settings 2 Off 2
Air In Line
Profiles
page undo ok

A B OPTIONS
A B OPTIONS

Set all C Maximum Rate C

Configuration 2 Computer Link 3
items to their Optional Modes
default values Optional Features
cancel ok page

A B OPTIONS A B OPTIONS

Regional Settings C Maximum Rate = C

Region= N. America 2 999.9 mL/hr 3
Language= English

undo ok ok

2A-22 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Versions 4.06 and 4.08

Figure 2-1. Map of Configuration Screens (Continued)

A B OPTIONS
A B OPTIONS

Mode = Mntr Off C KVO Rate = C

Baud Rate = 9600 3 5.0 mL/hr 4
Parity = Even

undo ok undo ok

A B OPTIONS A B OPTIONS

Loading Dose On C C
Dose Rate= On 3 Mode= Pressure 4
Multi-Step= Off Restarts= 3
Multi-Dose= Off Trends= On
undo ok Undo ok

A B OPTIONS
A B OPTIONS

Panel Lock= On C Audio C

VTBI= On 3 Volumes= Low Med Hi 4
Multi-Dose Alert=Off Trans. Tones= On

undo ok Undo ok

A B OPTIONS A B OPTIONS

KVO Rate C Config. Name= GOLD C

Monitoring Options 4 A B C D E F G H IJ K L M 4
Audio NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
Configuration Name 0123456789_

page undo enter ok

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 2A-23
Technical Service Manual
CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Versions 4.06 and 4.08

Figure 2-1. Map of Configuration Screens

(Continued)

A B OPTIONS A B OPTIONS

Resistance Options C Learn: Rev. 01.24 C

Pressure Options 5 Teach: Rev. 01.24 6
Manual Baseline

page page

A B OPTIONS A B OPTIONS

Resist Display= On C Learn Status C

Resist Alert = On 5 6
Default Alert = 100% Awaiting Download
Alarm = 600 mmHg
undo ok cancel start

A B OPTIONS A B OPTIONS

Pressure Dsply= On C Teach Status C

Pressure Alarm= Adj 5 6
Max Press= 600 mmHg Awaiting Start
Def Alarm= 600 mmHg 2D15 GOLD
undo ok cancel start

A B OPTIONS

Manual Baseline= C
C
On 5

undo ok

2A-24 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
2B CHECKOUT & CONFIGURATION
 Chapter 2B — CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Version 2.78

CAUTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION

Keep latch closed when instrument is This chapter describes the initial setup and
not in use. configuration of an instrument with software
version 2.78.

2.2 NEW INSTRUMENT CHECKOUT

CAUTION Refer to the instrument's Directions For Use
Should an instrument be jarred severely or (DFU) for instructions regarding unpacking
dropped, remove it from use immediately. It and setting up the instrument for the first
should be thoroughly tested and inspected by time.
qualified service personnel to ensure proper
When turning on the instrument, verify the
function prior to reuse.
instrument beeps and that all display LED
segments flash. This confirms that the
instrument has performed its self test and is
operating correctly. During operation, the
instrument continually performs a self test,
and will alarm and display a message if it
detects an internal malfunction.
Contact ALARIS Medical Systems
authorized service personnel if the
instrument has physical damage, fails to
satisfactorily pass startup sequence, fails a
self test or continues to alarm.
For new instrument checkout refer to the
applicable Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion
System DFU.

2.3 CONFIGURABLE OPTIONS AND

DEFAULTS
A hospital/facility biomedical technician has
the capability to set all configuration
parameters to their startup defaults in a
single operation. The terms "configuration
parameters" and "programmable features"
are interchangeable and have the same
meaning. Refer to the applicable Signature
Edition® GOLD Infusion System DFU for
more information.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 2B-1
Technical Service Manual
CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Version 2.78

2.4 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE

POWER RUN
HOLD

WARNINGS
• When an instrument’s configuration is ml/hr
changed, the configuration name OPT PRI HLD SEC KVO

should also be changed in order to PRI SEC

OPTIONS

document the new parameter settings.

The intent of the configuration name is
to have only one set of parameters for
each alpha-numeric code. Refer to
“Pop-Up Displays” section.
• Powering down in configuration mode 1 2 3
during an alarm or error will NOT save 4 5 6
any configuration changes.
7 8 9
The configuration procedure is for use by . 0 Clear Enter
qualified service personnel only. The
configuration mode is intended for
programming the technical and clinical
features in accordance with current
procedures and practices.
Table 2-3, “Record of Configured
NOTES:
Instruments,” can be reproduced and used
to record and track instrument • Pressing a soft key at the side of the Main
configuration settings. Display the first time, selects it for editing.
Some features are edited by subsequent
A map of all the configuration screens is presses of the soft key to cycle through
located at the end of this chapter (Figure available options. Other features are edited
2-2). by means of the numeric keypad entry.
• Pressing undo undoes any edits made to
that page, and stays on the page.
• Pressing ok accepts all information on the
page, and returns to menu page.
• Pressing the POWER switch after editing a
configurable item evokes an invalid key tone
and a message to "ok entry". ok must be
selected to accept the edit before the
instrument can be powered off.
• The page number is located in the upper-
right corner of the display.

2B-2 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Version 2.78

2.4 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE NOTE: For 7131/7231, the default code

(Continued) will be 4EF3 (instead of BFFF) for
instruments set to factory defaults.
CAUTION
2.4.2 Setting to Defaults
The instrument’s configuration information is
not lost when disconnected from AC power. The Set To Defaults mode programs all
However, error history and infusion program configuration items to their default values.
settings may be lost. If this information is to
be saved, be sure to record it before CAUTION
disconnecting power.
It is strongly recommended that the
Configurable Options be reviewed for a
2.4.1 Entering Configuration Mode complete list of defaults before using this
The instrument must be off (both channels feature.
must be off for dual-channel). 1. Advance to C2 page.
The procedure for the single and dual
channel instrument is the same. Any A B OPTIONS

configuration in the dual channel sets the Set To Defaults C

same value for both channels. Language 2
Air In Line
1. Press and hold left-bottom display soft
Dose Rate Drugs
key.
page
2. Press POWER switch. Continue to press
display soft key until configuration mode
display appears, then release.
2. Press Set to Defaults soft key.
Page C1 of configuration mode is
displayed. This is a read-only display.
A B OPTIONS

A B OPTIONS
Set All C
CONFIGURATION MODE C configuration 2
ID No. : 001234567 1 items to their
SW Rev.: 02.78 default values
Config.: BFFF IVAC cancel ok
page

3. Press ok to accept change and return to

beginning of C2 page. Pressing cancel
3. Press page to advance to page to be leaves all items set to their previous
configured. values and returns to beginning of C2
page.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 2B-3
Technical Service Manual
CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Version 2.78

2.4 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE 2.4.4 Setting Air-in-Line Threshold

(Continued)
The air-in-line threshold sets the bubble size
sensitivity. The air-in-line reset allows the
2.4.3 Setting Language
clinician to respond to an “Air-in-Line” alarm,
Language choices for Models 7130/7230 assess the clinical significance of the air,
are English and Canadian French. and choose whether or not to continue the
Language choices for Models 7131/7231 infusion without removing the air. The reset
are Dutch, English, French, German, Italian, feature allows only the current bubble to
Spanish and Swedish. All displays will be in proceed without tripping an alarm. The air
language selected, except diagnostic and in line threshold value choices are 50, 100,
configuration modes, which remain in 200 and 500 microliters.
English.
The Accumulator setting, when on, looks for
10% to 15% of the downstream path to be
A B OPTIONS
air before giving an “Accumulated Air-in-
Set To Defaults C Line” alarm. The amount of air that causes
Language 2 the alarm will vary with the threshold setting
Air In Line and rate.
Dose Rate Drugs
An “Air-in-Line” alarm is the result of the
page bubble size exceeding the Threshold
setting. An “Accumulated Air-in-Line” alarm
is the result when 10 to 15% of the
1. From C2 page, press Language soft key. downstream path is filled with air, exceeding
the accepted level looked for when
A B OPTIONS
Accumulator is set to On.
Language= C
English 2 A B OPTIONS

Set To Defaults C
Language 2
undo ok Air In Line
Dose Rate Drugs
page
2. Press soft key to select for editing. Press
again to cycle through language choices.
1. From C2 page, press Air In Line soft
NOTE: Dutch and German are choices in key.
the language options, but labels and DFUs
are not available in these languages for 2. Press Threshold soft key to select for
this software version. editing. Press again to cycle through 50
3. Press ok to accept change and return to mcL, 100 mcL, 200 mcL and 500 mcL.
beginning of C2 page.

2B-4 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Version 2.78

2.4 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE

(Continued) A B OPTIONS

2.4.4 Setting Air-in-Line Threshold Set To Defaults C

Language 2
(Continued)
Air In Line
NOTE: Use a 50 microliters setting on Dose Rate Drugs
microbore tubing. All other settings may page
be used on macrobore tubing.

A B OPTIONS

Air In Line C 1. From C2 page, press Dose Rate Drugs

Threshold= 100 mcL 2 soft key.
Reset= Off
Introduction screen appears and displays
Accumulator= On
legend used when selecting a drug.
undo ok
2. Page forward to select drug or select
done to go to Summary Page.
• Use short list symbol “s” to select
3. Press Reset soft key to select for editing. drugs that appear in short list. This is
Press again to cycle between On and a convenient way to display frequently
Off. used drugs immediately in normal
4. Press Accumulator soft key to select for drug selection process (startup mode,
editing. Press again to cycle between press options key).
On and Off. • Use extended list symbol “e” when
5. Press ok to accept change and return to selecting drugs to appear in extended
beginning of C2 page. list. Extended list, if configured,
provides a secondary list of drug
2.4.5 Setting Dose Rate Drugs names not normally used.

NOTE: In Models 7131/7231, Drug? is used

instead of a drug list option. There is no tick A B OPTIONS

mark next to Dose Rate. Dose Rate Drugs C

(s) = short list 2
The Dose Rate Drugs feature allows
(e) = extended list
selection of a drug name to program a dose
( ) = not displayed
rate calculated infusion while in normal
mode. done page

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 2B-5
Technical Service Manual
CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Version 2.78

Table 2-2. Drug List (7130/7230 only)

Alfentanil (Alfent) Methylprednisolone
Alprostadil (Prostin) (PGE-1) Milrinone
Alteplase (Activase) Morphene
Aminophylline Nitroglucerin (Tridil)
Amrione (Inocar) Nitroprusside (Nipride)
Atracurium (Tracurium) Norepinephrine (Levophed)
Bretylium (Bretylol) Oxytocin
Cimetidine (Tagamet) Phenylephrine (Neo-Synephrine)
Diltiazem (Cardizem) Potassium Chlor
Dobutamine (Dobutrex) Procainamide
Dopamine (Intropin) Propofol (Diprivan)
Esmilol (Brevibloc) Ranitidine (Zantac)
Heparin Streptokinase (Streptase)
Isoproterenol (Isuprel) Succinylcholine (Anectine)

Labetalo (Normodyne) (Trandate) Theophylline

Lidocaine (Xylocaine) Urokinase (Abbokinase)
Magnesium Sulfate Vecuronium (Norcuron)

2B-6 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Version 2.78

2.4 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE 8. Press review to return to introduction

(Continued) screen or press ok to accept selections
and return to C2 page.
2.4.5 Setting Dose Rate Drugs (continued)
2.4.6 Setting Maximum Rate
3. Press done at any time to display
Summary Page. Press page to This sets the maximum selectable rate. The
advance to next page. range for Maximum Rate is 0.1 to
999.9 mL/h.
4. Press Extended List soft key to cycle
between “s” and “blank”. If “blank” is
NOTES:
selected, extended list will not be
available. • The maximum rate setting applies to all
infusion modes.
A B OPTIONS
• Setting the Maximum Rate below the
EXTENDED LIST C preset KVO Rate will lower the KVO Rate.
s-Drug? 2 The KVO Rate will not exceed the
-Alfentanil Maximum Rate.
-Alprostadil 1. Advance to C3 page.
done page
A B OPTIONS

Maximum Rate C
Computer Link 3
5. Press Drug? soft key to cycle between Optional Modes
“s”, “e” and “blank”. Use “s” for Optional Features
commonly used drugs.
page
6. Press a soft key next to a drug to cycle
between “s”, “e” and “blank”. Press
Page to continue viewing drug list.
Refer to Table 2-2 “Drug List” to view full 2. Press Maximum Rate soft key.
list of drugs.
A B OPTIONS

7. Press done to display Summary Page.

Maximum Rate = C
A B OPTIONS 999.9 mL/hr 3

Summary C
14 drugs selected 2
EXT D LIST selected ok
Drug? Selected
review ok
3. Press the soft key to select the value for
editing.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 2B-7
Technical Service Manual
CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Version 2.78

2.4 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE

(Continued) A B OPTIONS

Maximum Rate C
2.4.6 Setting Maximum Rate (Continued) Computer Link 3
4. Use numeric keypad to enter maximum Optional Modes
rate. Press Enter. Optional Features
page
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
. 0 Clear Enter

A B OPTIONS
5. Press ok to accept change and return to
beginning of C3 page. Mode = Off C
Baud Rate = 9600 3
2.4.7 Setting Computer Link Parity = None
The Computer Link feature allows a
hospital/facility computer to interact with the undo ok
instrument and programs the level of
computer control available. The computer
cannot start or stop the instrument, set the
rate, or make any change in status. If the 1. On C3 page, press Computer Link soft
feature is off, the computer cannot key.
communicate with the instrument. 2. Press Mode soft key to select for editing.
Control Mode allows computer to send Press again to cycle through Off, Mntr
information to instrument’s display. Off and Ctrl Mntr Off.

Monitor Mode allows computer to only 3. Press Baud Rate soft key to select for
receive information from instrument. editing. Press again to cycle through
Enabling of monitoring mode automatically choices (300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2400,
places it in options menu. 4800 and 9600).

Off Mode does not allow any 4. Press Parity soft key to select for editing.
communication between instrument and a Press again to cycle through Even, Odd,
computer. and None.
5. Press ok to accept changes and return to
beginning of C3 page.

2B-8 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Version 2.78

2.4 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE NOTE: This feature allows an initial

(Continued) infusion rate to be set up for a specific
volume, automatically followed by a
2.4.8 Setting Optional Modes maintenance rate from the same
container.
The Optional Modes feature allows the
options menu to be configured to how it will 3. Press Dose Rate soft key to select for
appear in normal mode. Enabling of these editing. Press again to cycle between On
modes automatically places them in the and Off.
option menu.
NOTE: This feature allows dose
When Loading Dose, Multi-Step, and parameters to be programmed so that the
Multi-Dose are on, they appear in the menu instrument then calculates the volumetric
when the OPTIONS key is pressed in rate.
normal mode.
4. Press Multi-Step soft key to select for
For Dose Rate to appear in the options editing. Press again to cycle between On
menu, it must be turned on. and Off.

NOTE: This feature allows a sequential

A B OPTIONS
program to deliver up to nine steps; fluid
volumes and delivery rates may be
Maximum Rate C
Computer Link programmed for each step.
3
Optional Modes 5. Press Multi-Dose soft key to select for
Optional Features editing. Press again to cycle between
On and Off.
page
NOTE: This feature allows multiple
infusions to be programmed over a period
of up to 24 hours; the fluid volume and
1. On C3 page, press Optional Modes soft delivery rate is repeated for each delivery.
key.

A B OPTIONS A B OPTIONS

Loading Dose On C Loading Dose On C

Dose Rate = On 3 Dose Rate= On 3
Multi-Step = Off Multi-Step= Off
Multi-Dose = Off Multi-Dose= Off

undo ok undo ok

6. Press ok to accept changes and return to

2. Press Loading Dose soft key to select beginning of C3 page.
for editing. Press again to cycle between
On and Off.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 2B-9
Technical Service Manual
CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Version 2.78

2.4 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE 3. Verify VTBI is On.

(Continued)
NOTE: The flow sensor option (empty
2.4.9 Setting Optional Features container detector) needs to be installed
to be able to turn VTBI off.
The Panel Lock feature allows the front
panel to be locked and unlocked to help 4. Press Multi-Dose Alert soft key to select
prevent tampering. for editing. Press again to cycle between
On and Off.
When VTBI (volume to be infused) is on, a
volume to be infused must be entered; 5. Press ok to accept changes and return
otherwise, the last remaining VTBI or last to beginning of C3 page.
entered VTBI, depending on the channel's
2.4.10 Setting KVO Rate
last usage, will be in effect. When VTBI is
off, there is no VTBI line capability. The instrument will automatically operate at
the KVO rate (or current rate, whichever is
When the Multi-Dose Alert feature is on, the
less) once the primary VTBI has counted
option is available to set an alert at the end
down to zero. The KVO rate range is 0.1 to
of every dose when in the Multi-Dose mode.
20.0 mL/h.
A B OPTIONS
1. Advance to C4 page.
Maximum Rate C A B OPTIONS
Computer Link 3
Optional Modes KVO Rate C
Optional Features Monitoring Options 4
Audio
page
Configuration Name
page
1. On C3 page, press Optional Features
soft key.
2. Press KVO Rate soft key.
A B OPTIONS

Panel Lock= On C A B OPTIONS

VTBI= On 3 KVO Rate = C

Multi-Dose Alert=Off 5.0 mL/hr 4

undo ok
undo ok

2. Press Panel Lock soft key to select for

editing. Press again to cycle between
On and Off.

2B-10 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Version 2.78

2.4 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE Flow Resistance measurement dramatically

(Continued) improves the ability to detect partial and full
occlusions, particularly at low flow rates.
2.4.10 Setting KVO Rate (Continued) Resistance monitoring eliminates the impact
of patient elevation and flow rate, to provide
1 2 3 the most direct assessment of patency.
4 5 6
Both the Pressure and Flow Resistance
7 8 9 monitoring modes feature numeric and bar
. 0 Clear Enter graph displays of current values plus easily
selectable trend graphs, displaying up to
3. Press soft key next to rate value once to twelve hours of monitored values.
select for editing.
The Pressure Mode provides 1 mmHg
4. Use the numeric keypad to enter KVO display resolution, either manual or auto
rate. Press Enter. baseline setting, and a user-adjustable
alarm limit.
A B OPTIONS
The Resistance Mode provides two ranges
KVO Rate = C and user-alert limit adjustment, to meet
1.0 mL/hr 4 neonatal to adult patients’ needs.
Many monitoring features and functions are
configurable, by qualified technical
undo ok personnel, to meet specific needs by
allowing customization.
Monitoring Mode Options
5. Press ok to accept change and return to IV lines, catheters, and applications create
beginning of C4 page. various levels of resistance to flow.
Monitoring mode options are available to
NOTE: The KVO Rate will NOT exceed meet each clinical application, as follows:
the present Maximum Rate.
• Monitoring Options: to select IV line/site
2.4.11 Setting Dynamic Monitoring® System monitoring modes of resistance, high
Features resistance, and adjustable pressure.
The Signature Edition® Infusion System Pressure: highest occlusion method,
incorporates the Dynamic Monitoring® when set to a default of 600 mmHg,
System, a versatile intravenous site when Resistance and High Resistance
monitoring system for detection of both full modes are not sufficient.
and partial occlusions of the fluid pathway.
This system includes both precision
pressure sensing and continuously
computed Flow Resistance.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 2B-11
Technical Service Manual
CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Version 2.78

2.4 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE If resistance measurements initiate the

(Continued) Checking Line condition, the channel
will continue infusing in order to
2.4.11 Setting Dynamic Monitoring® determine if the measured flow
System Features (Continued) resistance has changed. In Resistance
Resistance: designed to monitor IV monitoring mode, if the measured flow
line/site resistance, providing optimum resistance falls to any value below 100%,
sensitivity. Used for larger catheter sizes the channel will resume normal operating
(up to 24 gauge). conditions automatically (excluding High
Resistance monitoring mode).
High Resistance: designed to monitor
IV line/site resistance, with optimum In resistance monitoring modes, pressure
sensitivity where smaller (higher measurements initiate the Checking Line
resistance) catheters (26 or 28 gauge) period when the pressure exceeds the
are used. limit. If the pressure falls to less than one
third of the configured limit within 40
AutoRestartPlus seconds, normal flow resumes.
The AutoRestartPlus feature provides the • In Pressure monitoring mode, the
ability to automatically continue an infusion Checking Line period is caused by
if downstream resistance or pressure pressure exceeding the alarm limit. If the
measurements indicate that an occlusion pressure falls to less than one third of the
condition has cleared with a 40-second alarm limit within 40 seconds, normal
Checking Line period (excluding High flow resumes.
Resistance monitoring mode). If the
Qualified service personnel can turn off this
condition is not cleared, the OCCLUSION
feature (set restarts to zero), or program
DOWNSTREAM alarm occurs and infusion
from 1 to 9 restarts.
is stopped until manually restarted.
• In High Resistance monitoring mode,
The Checking Line message and tone are
restarts do not occur for resistance
presented whenever a resistance or
measurements.
pressure measurement exceeds its alarm
threshold. After the programmed number of restarts
has occurred the channel will immediately
• In resistance monitoring modes, the
alarm OCCLUSION DOWNSTREAM, if
Checking Line period is caused by a
pressure or flow resistance conditions
measured resistance of 100% or a
indicate an occlusion. The programmed
pressure level exceeding a configured
number of restarts become available again
threshold. This pressure threshold is
when RUN/HOLD or the run soft key is
separate from the Pressure mode
pressed.
threshold.
NOTE: The restart counter is reset whenever
RUN/HOLD is pressed, the instrument or
channel is turned off or an alarm occurs.

2B-12 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Version 2.78

2.4 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE 2. Press Mode soft key to select for editing.
(Continued) Press again to cycle between Hi Resist,
Resist, and Pressure.
2.4.11 Setting Dynamic Monitoring®
3. Press Restarts soft key. Use numeric
System Features (Continued)
keypad to enter number of restarts, from
Trend Graphs "0" (which turns feature off) to "9", then
press Enter.
Trend graphs display downstream pressure
or flow resistance over time (up to 12 4. Press Trends soft key to select for
hours). editing. Press again to cycle between
On and Off.
In Pressure, Resistance, and High
Resistance monitoring modes, the trend • In Pressure mode, graph displays in
graph displays the flow pattern over time. mmHg.
Downstream occlusions, which occur in the
• Trend data is lost when:
Pressure or Resistance modes, will be
indicated by a vertical tick mark at the top of ♦ graph information is cleared
the trend screen. ♦ instrument is off for more than
6 hours
Trend graphs of fifteen minutes, one hour,
four hours, and twelve hours are available • Trend data is maintained when:
during normal operation. ♦ rate is changed
♦ instrument is off for less than
A B OPTIONS
6 hours
KVO Rate C • Trend data is scaled (by 3 times or by
Monitoring Options 4 1/3, as applicable) when cycling
Audio between Resistance and Hi
Configuration Name Resistance modes.
page 5. Press ok to accept changes and return to
beginning of C4 page.
6. Precision Flow: Selecting Pressure
1. On C4 page, press Monitoring Options Mode and running below 50 mL/h will
soft key. place instrument into Precision Flow
Mode.
A B OPTIONS

Precision Flow addresses both flow

Monitoring Options C resolution (parts or pulses per mL) and
Mode= Pressure 4 flow continuity (time between pulses).
Restarts= 3 The instrument will divide each mL into
Trends= On 3600 parts and equally space these parts
undo ok into a virtually continuous delivery. With
Precision Flow the longest time between
a part/pulse at 0.1 mL/h is 10 seconds.
As the rate increases, this time becomes
shorter.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 2B-13
Technical Service Manual
CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Version 2.78

2.4 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE 1. On C4 menu, press Audio soft key.

(Continued)
A B OPTIONS

2.4.11 Setting Dynamic Monitoring ®

System Features (Continued) Audio C

Volumes = Low Med Hi 4
NOTE: Resistance measurement is Trans. Tones = On
restarted at 0% when:
• RUN/HOLD is pressed to put on hold undo ok
and again to start.
• Dose ends in Multi-Dose mode.
• Checking Line message appears.
2. Press Volumes soft key to select for
Checking Line alert applies to pressure, editing. Press again to cycle between
resistance and upstream occlusion, with Low, Med, Hi, Med/Hi, or Hi.
one tone at the beginning and a flashing
3. Press Trans. Tone soft key to select for
popup display (on for 4 seconds, off for 6
editing. Press again to cycle between On
seconds). No nurse call activation.
and Off
2.4.12 Setting Audio Volume 4. Press ok to accept changes and return to
The volume settings determine which range beginning of C4 page.
of audio volume is available. For example,
2.4.13 Setting Configuration Name
"Low" may be too low, so "Med Hi" would be
(Instrument ID Label)
chosen. A transition tone, if enabled, will
sound upon completion of a secondary The characters entered here will be shown
VTBI, step in multi-step mode, dose in the lower LCD display. This electronic
beginning and ending in multi-dose mode, label is normally displayed, even when the
and completion of a loading dose in loading- pump is off.
dose mode.
The configuration name can be used to
The speaker volumes are approximately: uniquely identify the instrument's
Low = 60 dB, Med = 65 dB, and Hi = 70 dB configuration, facility location, or reference
at one meter. number. It is a 4 character alpha-numeric
name. For example, PICU (Pediatric
A B OPTIONS Intensive Care Unit), ICU (Intensive Care
Unit), or 2400.
KVO Rate C
Monitoring Options 4 NOTE: A 4-digit alpha-numeric code can be
Audio seen next to the configuration name upon
Configuration Name entering Configuration Mode (refer to
“Entering Configuration Mode” section in this
page
chapter). This code is only a hexadecimal
reflection of the instrument’s configuration.

2B-14 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Version 2.78

2.4 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE NOTES:

(Continued)
• If the configuration has been changed,
2.4.13 Setting Configuration Name but not the name, the instrument will
display the option to rename before
(Instrument ID Label) (Continued)
turning off or proceeding to the Teach
Mode. Refer to “Pop-Up Displays”
A B OPTIONS section for further explanation.

KVO Rate C • There must be 4 characters in the

Monitoring Options configuration name. Use the space
4
symbol ( _ ) to fill any open characters.
Audio
Configuration Name
2.5 TRANSFERRING SETTINGS TO
page ANOTHER INSTRUMENT
Once an instrument has been programmed
to meet technical and clinical needs, the
settings can be transferred to other
1. On C4 menu, press Configuration instruments. The programmed instrument is
Name soft key. referred to as the "Teacher" and the other
instrument is referred to as the "Learner".
A B OPTIONS

NOTE: Only the configuration settings will be

Config. Name= IVAC C transferred. The instrument ID number,
ABCDEFGHIJKLM 4 periodic maintenance settings, and other
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ settings from the diagnostics mode will not be
0123456789_ transferred.

undo enter ok Connect a standard 9-pin Null Modem

RS-232 cable (ALARIS P/N 133450) to the
RS-232 ports on the instruments.

2. Press Config. Name soft key to position 2.5.1 Learn/Teach Instrument

highlight on character to be changed. Procedure
3. Press character soft keys aligned with NOTE: The Learn/Teach function will not
rows A to M, N to Z or O to "_" to work if the revision level for Learn/Teach is
highlight desired character. not the same on both instruments. It is not
recommended to Learn/Teach different
4. Press Enter. Up to 4 characters can be
model families; such as, using a Model
programmed in this way. Repeat steps 7130/7230 to Learn/Teach a Model
2, 3, 4 as necessary. 7131/7231.
5. Press ok to accept changes and return
to beginning of C4 page.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 2B-15
Technical Service Manual
CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Version 2.78

2.5 TRANSFERRING SETTINGS TO NOTES:

ANOTHER INSTRUMENT (Continued)
• Repeat allows the operator to
2.5.1 Learn/Teach Instrument reattempt teaching the current
instrument or to teach the next
Procedure (Continued)
instrument.
1. Access Configuration Mode for both • Reattach the cover, and/or cover and
"teacher" and "learner" instruments and screws, over RS-232 port after
advance to page C5. disconnecting the cable.
A B OPTIONS
2.5.2 Pop-Up Displays
Learn: Rev. 01.20 C The pop-up screens appear when an
Teach: Rev. 01.20 5 attempt is made to turn off an instrument or
Resistance Options execute the teach mode after changing the
Pressure Options configuration (or accessing a configured
page item) but not changing the configuration
name. If the instrument's configuration is
changed and not the configuration name,
instruments with the same name may have
2. Press Teach soft key of "teacher" different configurations. The pop-up menus
instrument and Press the Learn soft key ask if the configuration should be renamed.
of "learner" instrument.
A B OPTIONS
A B OPTIONS

Configuration has C
Teach Status C been changed.
5 Press POWER key
Awaiting Start
to keep name IVAC.
BFFF IVAC
cancel rename
cancel start

3. Press start soft key on "teacher" OPTIONS

A B
instrument.
Configuration has C
Downloading displays until transfer is
been changed.
complete, and then displays if transfer
Press teach key
was successful or unsuccessful.
to keep name IVAC.
cancel teach rename

2B-16 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Version 2.78

2.6 RESISTANCE OPTIONS 2. Press Resist Display soft key to select

for editing. Press again to cycle between
Resistance Display: Provides a bar graph
On and Off.
and indication of resistance in the line while
monitoring a single channel. NOTE: Setting Resist Display to Off will
Resistance Alert: Provides an early clear Default Alert from the screen and
warning of increases in downstream flow change Resist Alert to Off.
resistance by allowing the level to be 3. Press Resist Alert soft key to select for
adjusted in 5% increments during operation. editing. Press again to cycle between
Default Alert: Provides a starting point for On and Off.
occlusion detection if a different level has
not been chosen. The selected level will NOTES:
remain in effect while the instrument is on, • Setting Resist Alert to Off will clear
until another option is selected from the Default Alert from the screen.
Monitoring Options page. The channel will • Resistance alert will give an alarm tone
retain the selected option up to six hours every thirty seconds, with a popup
after the instrument is turned off. After six display (on for 4 seconds, off for 6
hours the channel will return to the default seconds). Nurse call activated. This
setting. occurs when the resistance
measurement is above the alert
Alarm: Provides the option to lower the threshold or at 100%, even when
pressure occlusion setting that is still active, checking the line. If the display is off,
even in resistance modes. the alert feature will automatically be
turned off.
A B OPTIONS
4. Press Default Alert soft key to select for
Learn: Rev. 01.20 C editing. Enter a number using keypad,
Teach: Rev. 01.20 5 then press Enter. The instrument will
Resistance Options round up or down to the nearest 5%
Pressure Options increment.
page
NOTE: To set the Default Alert level,
both Resist Display and Resist Alert
need to be On.
1. Advance to C5 page. 5. Press Alarm soft key to select for editing.
A B OPTIONS Enter a number using keypad, then press
Enter.
Resist Display= On C
Resist Alert = On 6. Press ok to accept change and return to
5
beginning of C5 page.
Default Alert = 100%
Alarm = 600 mmHg
undo ok

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 2B-17
Technical Service Manual
CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Version 2.78

2.7 PRESSURE OPTIONS the first time RUN/HOLD is pressed; this will
be the maximum baseline. Subsequent
Pressure Display: Provides a bar graph
presses of RUN/HOLD will only lower (not
and indication of pressure in the line while
raise) the baseline.
monitoring a single channel.
Manual Baseline: Sets a fixed baseline
Pressure Alarm: Allows the choice of a
and overrides the Auto Zero level until the
fixed pressure mode or an adjustable
instrument is turned off, the latch is opened,
pressure mode.
the set is reloaded, or the pressure baseline
• Adjustable Pressure: Provides an early function is performed again. This allows the
warning of increases in downstream instrument to display the actual pressure
pressure. Designed to monitor IV required for an IV to infuse. To get this real
line/site based on pressure, and provide time readout, Manual Baseline must be
user- adjustable pressure alarm limits. On.
Used for the smallest of catheter sizes
To activate this mode with the instrument on
and special applications; such as infusion
hold, or at startup, press the Options key
through transducers, into dialysis
and then select Set Pressure Baseline and
systems, and for the highest resistance
press ok.
catheters (including some neonatal PICC
catheters). When RUN/HOLD is pressed, the bar graph
• Fixed Pressure: Designed to monitor IV will show the alarm point and the actual
line/site pressure and alarm, based on a pressure in the line will be displayed below
fixed pressure limit of 600 mmHg. Used the bar graph.
when adjustable pressure is not wanted.
Used for the smallest of catheter sizes A B OPTIONS

and special applications; such as, Learn: Rev. 01.20 C

infusion through transducers, into dialysis Teach: Rev. 01.20 5
systems, and for the highest resistance Resistance Options
catheters (including some neonatal PICC Pressure Options
catheters).
page
Alarm: Provides an adjustable pressure
setting in 25 mmHg increments (25-600
range). This acts as the default setting after
the instrument has been off for more than 1. Advance to C5 page.
6 hours and the previous setting was A B OPTIONS
cleared. Pressure Alarm = Adj must be
selected to change from 600 mmHg. Pressure Dsply= On C
Pressure Alarm= Adj 5
Auto Baseline: The instrument reads a Alarm = 600 mmHg
baseline at startup and then adds the alarm
Manual Baseline=On
limit, to determine the point of alarm. For
example, if an alarm limit of 300 mmHg was undo ok
selected, the instrument would alarm at
baseline + 300 mmHg. Auto Zeroing occurs

2B-18 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Version 2.78

2.7 PRESSURE OPTIONS (Continued)

2. Press Pressure Dsply soft key to select
for editing. Press again to cycle between
On and Off.
3. Press Pressure Alarm soft key to select
for editing. Press again to cycle between
Adj and Fix.
4. Press Alarm soft key to select for editing.
Enter a number using keypad, then press
Enter. Instrument will round up or down
to nearest 25 mmHg increment.
5. Press Manual Baseline soft key to select
for editing. Press again to cycle between
On and Off.
6. Press ok to accept change and return to
beginning of C5 page.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 2B-19
Technical Service Manual
CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Version 2.78

Table 2-3. Record of Configured Instruments

#1 #2 #3 #4 #5
§ Instrument ID/Serial #

Config Name
(Instr Label)

Location

Language

Air-In-Line:

Threshold µl µl µl µl µl
Reset
Accumulator

Dose Rate Drugs (See Table 2-4 “Drug List “)

Maximum Rate mL/h mL/h mL/h mL/h mL/h mL/h

Computer Link:

Mode
Baud Rate
Parity

Optional Modes:

Loading Dose
Dose Rate
Multi-Step
Multi-Dose

Optional Features

Panel Lock
VTBI
Multi-Dose Alert

KVO Rate mL/h mL/h mL/h mL/h mL/h mL/h

--- Table Continued on Next Page ---

2B-20 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Version 2.78

Table 2-3. Record of Configured Instruments (Continued)

#1 #2 #3 #4 #5

Monitoring Options:

Mode
Restarts
Trends

Audio:

Volume
Trans. Tone

Resistance Options:

Resist Display
Resist Alarm
Default Alarm % % % % %
Alarm mmHg mmHg mmHg mmHg mmHg

Pressure Options:

Pressure Display
Pressure Alarm
Alarm mmHg mmHg mmHg mmHg mmHg
Manual Baseline

§Instrument ID/Serial # is accessed through Diagnostic Mode. Refer to the “Entering Diagnostic
Mode” section in the “Troubleshooting” chapter.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 2B-21
Technical Service Manual
CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Version 2.78

Table 2-4. Drug List Configuration

Facility:
Unit:

DRUG NAME/OPTION TRADE NAME NOT SELECTED SHORT LIST EXTENDED LIST
Extended List Access
DRUG?
Alfentanil Alfenta
Alprostadil Prostin (PGE-1)
Alteplase Activase
AminoPhylline
Amrinone Inocar
Atracurium Tracurium
Bretylium Bretylol
Cimetidine Tagamet
Diltiazem Cardizem
Dobutamine Dobutrex
Dopamine Intropin
Esmolol Brevibloc
Heparin
Isoproterenol Isuprel
Labetalol Normodyne /Trandate
Lidocaine Xylocaine
Magnesium Sulfate
Methylprednisolone
Milrinone
Morphine
Nytroglycerin Tridil
Nitroprusside Nipride
Norepinephrine Levophed
Ocytocin
Phenlyphrine Neo-Synephrine
Potassium Chlor
Procainamide
Propofol Dipravan
Ranitidine Zantac
Streptokinase Streptase
Succinylcholine Anectine
Theophylline
Urokinase Abbokinase
Vecuronium Norcuron

2B-22 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Version 2.78

Figure 2-2. Map of Configuration Screens

A B OPTIONS
A B OPTIONS

CONFIGURATION MODE C Air In Line C

ID No. : 001234567 1 Threshold= 100 mcL 2
SW Rev.: 02.78 Reset= Off
Config.: BFFF IVAC Accumulator= On
page
undo ok

A B OPTIONS
A B OPTIONS

Set To Defaults C Dose Rate Drugs C

Language 2 (s) = short list 2
Air In Line
(e) = extended list
Dose Rate Drugs
( ) = not displayed
page
done page

A B OPTIONS
A B OPTIONS

Set All C Maximum Rate C

configuration 2 Computer Link 3
items to their Optional Modes
default values Optional Features

cancel ok page

A B OPTIONS
A B OPTIONS

Language= C Maximum Rate = C

English 2 999.9 mL/hr 3

undo ok ok

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 2B-23
Technical Service Manual
CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Version 2.78

Figure 2-2. Map of Configuration Screens (Continued)

A B OPTIONS

A B OPTIONS
Mode = Off C
Baud Rate = 9600 3 KVO Rate = C
Parity = None 5.0 mL/hr 4

undo ok
undo ok

A B OPTIONS
A B OPTIONS

Loading Dose On C
Dose Rate = On Monitoring Options C
3 Mode= Pressure
Multi-Step = Off
4
Restarts= 3
Multi-Dose = Off
Trends= On
undo ok
undo ok

A B OPTIONS
A B OPTIONS

Panel Lock= On C
VTBI= On 3 Audio C
Multi-Dose Alert=Off Volumes = Low Med Hi 4
Trans. Tones = On

undo ok
undo ok

A B OPTIONS
A B OPTIONS

KVO Rate C
Config. Name= IVAC C
Monitoring Options 4
Audio
ABCDEFGHIJKLM 4
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
Configuration Name
0123456789_
page
undo enter ok

2B-24 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Version 2.78

Figure 2-2. Map of Configuration Screens (Continued)

A B OPTIONS
A B OPTIONS

Learn: Rev. 01.20 C Resistance Display = On C

Teach: Rev. 01.20 5 Resistance Alert = On 5
Resistance Options Default Alert = 100%
Pressure Options Alarm = 600 mmHg
page undo ok

A B OPTIONS
A B OPTIONS

Learn Status C Pressure Display = On C

5 Pressure Alarm = Adj 5
Awaiting Download Alarm = 600 mmHg
Manual Baseline = On
cancel undo ok

A B OPTIONS

Teach Status C
5
Awaiting Start
BFFF IVAC
cancel start

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 2B-25
Technical Service Manual
CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Version 2.78

T H I S PA G E
I N T E N T I O N A L LY
LEFT BLANK

2B-26 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
3 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
 Chapter 3 — PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

WARNING 3.1 INTRODUCTION

Failure to perform regular and preventive To ensure the Signature Edition® GOLD
maintenance inspections may result in improper Infusion System remains in good operating
instrument operation. condition, regular and preventive
maintenance inspections are required.
Regular inspections must be performed by
hospital/facility before each use.
Preventive maintenance inspections should
be performed once a year in accordance
with ALARIS Medical Systems requirements
and guidelines. A maintenance reminder will
occur after 52 weeks, unless the feature has
been changed to select a different time
interval or has been disabled. These
inspections are also intended to complement
the intent of JCAHO requirements.
Use Table 3-1, "PM Inspections," to record
the completion of preventive maintenance
inspections.

3.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

INSPECTIONS
A message can be set through the
diagnostics mode which automatically
reminds the user when preventive
maintenance inspections are due. Refer to
"Setting Preventive Maintenance Interval"
section in the “Troubleshooting” chapter.

3.2.1 Regular Inspection

Regular inspections consist of a visual
inspection for damage and cleanliness, and
performing the procedure described in the
“Start-Up” section of the Directions for Use
(DFU), before each usage of the instrument.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 3-1
Technical Service Manual
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

3.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE check that each switch performs its proper
INSPECTIONS (Continued) function. Refer to "Testing Switches" section
of the “Troubleshooting” chapter.
3.2.1 Regular Inspection (Continued)
Mechanism
Case
Clean any surfaces where solution or
Examine the instrument for overall obstructions have accumulated. Verify:
condition. The case should be clean and
free from IV solution residue, especially • Mechanism seal is not torn or worn.
near moving parts. Also check for dried • Cam followers are not broken or cracked
solution deposits on accessible areas of air- and are free of foreign matter.
in-line sensor, pressure transducer, and
latch mechanism. Check that labels and • Proper operation of latching mechanism.
markings are legible. Cam followers should retract and extend
smoothly.
Mounting Bracket
• Air-in-line arm moves smoothly from
Pole mounting bracket should be secure opened to closed position.
and functioning. If the instrument is
• Fluid Control Actuator rotates 180°.
mounted on a pole or stand, examine the
condition of the mount. Also, examine the
3.2.2 Functional Test
pole and stand.
1. Turn instrument on without set installed.
Power Cord Assembly Verify it "beeps" and red alarm light
Examine the power cord assembly for: flashes.

• Signs of damage, cuts or deformities in 2. Set infusion rate to 460 mL/h and VTBI to
the cord. If damaged, replace the entire 100 mL.
cord. 3. Press RUN/HOLD switch with latch
• Integrity of hospital grade power plug. closed, and rate and VTBI ≠ 0 to cause
Attempt to wiggle blades to ensure they "set out" and "air in line" messages.
are secure. If any damage is suspected, 4. Open latch.
replace entire cord.
5. Install primed administration set with
• Appropriate tension and connection. latch open.
Applicable only if IV pole has electrical
receptacles for accessories. 6. Verify instrument displays "air in line" and
"latch open" messages.
• Strain reliefs. Examine strain reliefs at
both ends of line cord. Be sure they hold 7. Close latch and verify display returns to
cord securely. setup page.

Keypad 8. Perform upstream occlusion test as

follows:
Check membrane switches for damage,
such as from fingernails and pens. During a. Verify infusion rate is set to 460 mL/h.
the course of the inspection, be sure to

3-2 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

3.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 3.2.3 Flow Stop Test

INSPECTIONS (Continued)
1. Turn power off with administration set
primed and loaded in instrument.
3.2.2 Functional Test (Continued)
2. With all tubing clamps open and fluid
b. With instrument on hold, or at start-up,
container 2 or more feet above
verify primary VTBI is set to 100.
instrument, verify no fluid flows out of set.
c. Press RUN/HOLD switch to begin
3. Remove set. Verify no fluid flows out of
infusion.
set.
d. Clamp off IV line just above
instrument to simulate an upstream 3.2.4 Rate Calibration Procedure
occlusion. Verify instrument stops
To maintain system accuracy, the rate
running, alarms, and displays
calibration should be done first, followed by
OCCLUSION UPSTREAM within 60
a verification rate test, when doing
seconds.
Preventive Maintenance or post repair
e. Press RUN/HOLD switch to silence testing.
alarm and put instrument on hold.
1. Change Cal # to "0.0" to run rate
f. Remove or open clamp on line. calibration and calculate a new
g. Press RUN/HOLD switch to resume calibration number.
infusion. Alarm should not reoccur.
NOTES:
9. Perform downstream occlusion test as • Once the Rate Cal # is set to "0.0" and
follows: accepted, the instrument will need to be
a. Continue infusing from above step. run for at least two seconds before the
Rate Cal # can be changed to a non-
b. Verify rate is set to 460 mL/h. Clamp zero value. If not, the instrument will
off set just below instrument. display Do Rate Accuracy Test at 0%.
The instrument will not allow one non-
c. Allow instrument to run until it alarms zero value to be changed to another
OCCLUSION DOWNSTREAM within non-zero value.
60 seconds.
• Rate Calibration is run at the nominal
d. Press RUN/HOLD switch to silence value (0.0%) so that the percentage
alarm and put instrument on hold. can be directly entered in the
instrument without another calculation.
e. Release or open clamp.
2. Run rate calibration (using an 80VCS
f. Press RUN/HOLD switch to resume
set) at 400 mL/h, with a VTBI of 40 mL
infusion. Alarm should not reoccur.
and VI reset to zero. Follow procedure in
“Post Calibration Rate Accuracy
Verification” section, steps 1-23, and then
determine rate calibration number (in %),
as shown below.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 3-3
Technical Service Manual
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

3.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE • Rate calibration number was

INSPECTIONS (Continued) changed and instrument now passes
Post Calibration Rate Accuracy
3.2.4 Rate Calibration Procedure (Continued) Verification.
Calculate volume accuracy as follows: • Mechanism replacement is required.
Volumetric Volume Accuracy 4. Reverse sign (+/- ) of % Error value from
Error Computation Rate Calibration results in step 3.
Vcollected = Example:
volume in burette in milliliters
Result is 4% high (+4%). Reverse the
Vexpected =
sign (to get -4%). Number to enter for
characterized volume printed on
Rate Cal # is -4%.
80VCS set insert
Step 1: NOTES:
A = Vcollected / Vexpected • In the example above, the new Rate
Step 2: Cal # tells the instrument to count more
B = A x 100 volume per revolution of the
mechanism, so that the output will be
Step 3: less due to fewer revolutions.
% Error (Round % Error to nearest
• The limits for the rate calibration entry
tenth of a percent.) = B - 100
are -15.6 to +5.3%, to adjust for
differences from mechanism to
mechanism. If the Rate Cal # is outside
NOTES: this range, then the mechanism needs
• The range of the percent error can be to be replaced.
from -5.3 to +15.6%, based on
mechanism to mechanism differences 5. Enter new Rate Cal # for applicable
and performing the initial run for
channel using keypad and bottom center
calibration at 0.0%.
soft key (+/- ) for sign. Press ENTER.
• In addition to performing this process
during Preventive Maintenance, this NOTES:
process would also apply when
• Make sure the "+/- " sign is used with
replacing a mechanism or installing a
the percent change when doing rate
new main board assembly.
calibration.
3. Do not remove 80VCS set from
• To change the rate calibration number,
instrument until one of following is refer to “Viewing/Changing Rate
determined: Calibration Information” section in
• Instrument has passed Post “Troubleshooting” chapter.
Calibration Rate Accuracy
Verification and calibration is not
needed.

3-4 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

3.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

CAUTION
INSPECTIONS (Continued)
Due to the Dynamic Monitoring® Feature,
3.2.4 Rate Calibration Procedure (Continued) the rate is varied during operation. For this
reason, ALARIS Medical Systems does not
6. Press ok soft key to accept change and recommend using automatic testers to
return to beginning of D4 page. check rate accuracy. Generally, these
devices collect small samples and may
NOTE: When the main board is changed,
cause results to be incorrect, even though
the Rate Cal # defaults to 100% and 0.0
mL/rev. Reset the Rate Cal # to "0.0%" or
the instrument is accurate.
previous Cal #, to clear an Instrument It is recommended, with the initial use of the
Malfunction message.
80VCS set on each instrument, to perform
rate calibration first, to save time.
3.2.5 Post Calibration Rate Accuracy
Verification Do not use the Model 80VCS Calibration
Perform the following steps without Set for more than 15 rate calibration and
removing the 80VCS set or turning the post calibration rate accuracy verifications
instrument off. (count one use for both calibration and
verification of the same instrument).
Figure 3-1. Rate Accuracy Test Setup
Water source

Burette
(50 mL)

Burette 30 + 2 inches
Clamp

Equipment
Stand

Tubing 80VCS
Three- Rate Cal Set
Way
Stopcock

Instrument Stand
Table or
Bench IV Tubing

Used Fluid
Receptacle

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 3-5
Technical Service Manual
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

3.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 14. Press RUN/HOLD to stop infusion.

INSPECTIONS (Continued)
15. Adjust height of instrument and/or fluid
container to attain a head height of 30 ±1
3.2.5 Post Calibration Rate Accuracy
inches / 76.2 ±2.5 centimeters between
Verification (Continued)
middle of pumping mechanism and fluid
Keep track of the number of times the set is level in either the:
used by recording each use on the 80VCS
insert or on a separate record. NOTE: A 30" head height was used in
the initial qualification of this process and
1. Fill solution container with clean tap is the recommended head height. Based
water. Close AccuSlide® Flow Regulator on observed field use, a 24" head height
was also tested and verified for the Rate
clamp on 80VCS Calibration Set and
Accuracy Specification.
then insert spike into solution container.
• bag or vented bottle (vent closed on
2. Open AccuSlide® Flow Regulator clamp
administration set)
and prime set. Pay particular attention to
ensure all air is expelled from set. Close or
AccuSlide® Flow Regulator clamp. • drip chamber (unvented bottle with
3. Connect output of set to one side of vent open on administration set).
three-way stopcock. 16. Adjust fluid level in burette until meniscus
is level with zero mark on burette.
4. Load set into instrument.
5. Close latch. NOTE: The instrument may need to be
run to prime the line to the zero level of
6. Verify there is no fluid flow or drops the burette (step 13).
falling in drip chamber.
17. Verify primary infusion rate is 400 mL/h.
7. Plug instrument into a properly grounded
AC outlet. 18. Reset VTBI to 40 mL and clear volume
infused.
8. Set stopcock to output into a class A or B
burette. 19. Press RUN/HOLD to start primary
infusion.
9. Press POWER to turn channel on.
20. Instrument will run approximately 360
10. Set primary infusion rate to 400 mL/h. seconds (6 minutes) to complete delivery
11. Set VTBI to 20 mL. and then go into KVO mode. Stop
instrument within 1 second of its entering
12. Ensure instrument (both channels if dual KVO mode.
channel) is set to Pressure mode.
21. Make a note of volume collected in
NOTE: The factory default for the burette.
Monitoring Options mode is Pressure.
22. Note expected volume, as identified on
13. Press RUN/HOLD to start primary 80VCS calibration set insert.
infusion. Infuse until tubing and burette
are fully primed (approximately 1 minute).

3-6 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

3.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE • outside a range of -5.5 to +7.0% from

INSPECTIONS (Continued) expected volume, return instrument to
ALARIS Medical Systems for repair or
3.2.5 Post Calibration Rate Accuracy replace mechanism.
Verification (Continued)
27. Set stopcock to drain fluid in burette to
23. Do not remove 80VCS set from zero level, in preparation for next test.
instrument until one of following is
determined: NOTE: If additional low rate (5 to 20 mL/h)
testing is desired, use an 80VCS set and
• Instrument has passed rate collect at least 6 mL of fluid. The results
verification and calibration is not should be ±5% of the expected output. At
needed. lower rates (less than 5 mL/h),
evaporation may need to be prevented or
• Rate calibration number was changed
accounted for in the results. Calibration
and instrument now passes must be performed at 400 mL/h and
verification. collecting 40 mL of fluid.
• Mechanism replacement is required.
3.2.6 Pressure Calibration
24. Calculate volume accuracy as follows:
1. Place instrument on bench or other flat
Volumetric Volume Accuracy surface and connect to AC power.
Error Computation
2. Connect pressure meter, pressure
Vcollected = volume in burette in mL source, and reservoir to pressure
Vexpected = characterized volume calibration set. Refer to Figure 3-2
printed on 80VCS set insert "Pressure Test Setup".
3. Install a pressure cal set (70ISS) into
Step 1: A = Vcollected ' Vexpected instrument.
Step 2: B = A x 100
Step 3: % Error (Round % Error to 4. Enter Diagnostics Mode by pressing and
nearest tenth of a percent.) = B - 100 holding top soft key, then turn instrument
25. Result should be 0.0±1%. on and release soft key when diagnostics
display appears. Refer to "Entering
26. If volume accuracy does not fall within Diagnostics Mode" section in
required range of ±1% from expected “Troubleshooting” chapter.
volume and test results were:
• inside a range of -5.5 to +7.0% from
expected volume, perform "Rate
Calibration Procedure". Set rate
calibration number to 0.0% before
running rate test, to determine a new
calibration number.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 3-7
Technical Service Manual
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

3.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 6. Adjust pressure to "0 mmHg" from test

INSPECTIONS (Continued) fixture. Press and release 0 mmHg soft key.
If readings are in a valid range, it will display
3.2.6 Pressure Calibration (Continued) Pass.
5. Advance to D6 page by pressing page soft 7. Apply 500 mmHg (±2 mmHg) from test
key 5 times. fixture. Press and release 500 mmHg soft
key. If readings are in a valid range, it will
On D6 page, press Cal A Pressure or Cal
display Pass.
B Pressure (dual channel). D6A or D6B
will be displayed, depending on which 8. Remove 500 mmHg pressure applied to
channel was selected. instrument, then remove set.
A B OPTIONS 9. Press ok soft key to accept calibration and
return to main D6 page.
Cal A Pressure D
DAC A Settings 6 10. Set sensor check/calibration verification:
Cal B Pressure a. Press Cal A Pressure or Cal B Pressure
DAC B Settings (dual) soft key to re-enter the same Cal
page Pressure screen.
b. Verify both 0 mmHg and 500 mmHg
readings display Pass.
c. Install a standard set and close latch.
Verify reading is over 170.
Figure 3-2. Pressure Test Setup

70ISS Pressure
Calibration Set

Pressure
Gauge

0 775
PSI
mmHg

Air Pressure Source

Instrument 0 - 500 mmHg
Stand
Reservoir

3-8 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

3.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 5. Press lower left soft key to highlight

INSPECTIONS (Continued) Rated Cap value.
6. Using numeric keypad, enter 0.0 (in
3.2.6 Pressure Calibration (Continued)
Rated Cap value).
d. Remove set. Verify Sensor = reading is
7. Press the ok soft key (bottom right).
in -80 to +30 mmHg range without set
installed. If instrument will not soft cal, 8. Repeat step 4 to access 'Battery Status'.
perform Hard Pressure Cal Procedure
9. Repeat step 5 to highlight Rated Cap
(“Corrective Maintenance” chapter).
value.
10. Using numeric keypad, enter 1.3 in Rated
A B OPTIONS Cap.
11. Press ok soft key.
Calibrate Pressure D
0 mmHg=1100 Pass 6 12. Press and hold POWER key for a second
500 mmHg=2400 Pass A to power instrument down.
Sensor=+001 Pass Battery Refresh procedure has been
ok initiated and will continue to run until
complete, whether instrument is on or off,
generally 12 to 24 hours. Instrument
needs to be connected to AC power
during this period. Disconnecting
3.2.7 Ground Current Leakage Test instrument from AC power will stop
Refer to the applicable Signature Edition® refresh cycle.
GOLD Infusion System DFU. METHOD TWO
3.2.8 Ground Resistance Test 1. Disconnect instrument from AC power.
Refer to the applicable Signature Edition® 2. Disconnect battery from instrument.
GOLD Infusion System DFU. 3. Press and hold POWER key for
5 seconds.
3.2.9 Battery Refresh Cycle
4. Reconnect battery and connect
METHOD ONE instrument to AC power.
1. Connect instrument to AC power. Battery Refresh procedure has been
2. Enter Diagnostics mode by holding top initiated and will continue to run until
left soft key while powering instrument complete, whether instrument is on or off,
on. generally 12 to 24 hours. Instrument
needs to be connected to AC power
3. Press page soft key (bottom right) to during this period. Disconnecting
advance to D2 page. instrument from AC power will stop
4. Press lower left soft key to access refresh cycle.
Battery Status screen.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 3-9
Technical Service Manual
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

3.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 3.3 STORAGE AND CLEANING

INSPECTIONS (Continued)
Refer to the applicable Signature Edition®
GOLD Infusion System DFU.
3.2.10 Reset Time
1. Enter Diagnostic Mode and advance to 3.3.1 Storage
D2 page.
The instrument may be stored without
2. Reset hours and minutes as needed from connection to AC power. It will automatically
time reference. Refer to “Setting Time disconnect the battery when the voltage
(and Date)” in the “Troubleshooting” gets too low. To reuse the instrument after
chapter. storage, connect it to AC power for a
minimum of three (3) hours before placing it
NOTE: Clock will lose about 3 minutes back into service. When temporarily taking
per month since it is not a true real-time the instrument out of service, connect it to
clock. Once reset, the previous loop will
AC power to ensure a fully charged battery
not be affected or adjusted.
when needed.
3.2.11 Reset PM Due
Enter Diagnostic Mode and go to D2 page.
Access PM Setup and reset PM Due by
pressing lower-left soft key.

3-10 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

Table 3-1. PM Inspections

I.D. Number Instrument Serial Number

Ref.
Frequency Date Completed Date Completed
Section
Regular Inspection 3.2.1 Every Use
(record every 12 months)

Functional Test 3.2.2 12 Months

Flow Stop Test 3.2.3 12 Months
Rate Calibration Procedure 3.2.4 12 Months
Post Calibration Rate Accuracy Verification 3.2.5 12 Months
Pressure Calibration 3.2.6 12 Months
Ground Current Leakage Test 3.2.7 12 Months
Ground Resistance Test 3.2.8 12 Months
Battery Refresh Cycle 3.2.9 12 Months
Reset Time 3.2.10 12 Months

I.D. Number Instrument Serial Number

Ref.
Frequency Date Completed Date Completed
Section
Regular Inspection 3.2.1 Every Use
(record every 12 months)

Functional Test 3.2.2 12 Months

Flow Stop Test 3.2.3 12 Months
Rate Calibration Procedure 3.2.4 12 Months
Post Calibration Rate Accuracy Verification 3.2.5 12 Months
Pressure Calibration 3.2.6 12 Months
Ground Current Leakage Test 3.2.7 12 Months
Ground Resistance Test 3.2.8 12 Months
Battery Refresh Cycle 3.2.9 12 Months
Reset Time 3.2.10 12 Months

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 3-11
Technical Service Manual
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

T H I S PA G E
I N T E N T I O N A L LY
LEFT BLANK

3-12 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
4 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
 Chapter 4 — PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

4.1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the mechanical and
electrical systems that comprise the Signature
Edition® GOLD Infusion System.

4.2 GENERAL INFORMATION

The main PCB for both the single and dual
channel instrument is a double-sided multi-
layered Surface Mount Technology (SMT)
board. If a board is determined to have failed,
it can be replaced or the instrument can be
returned to ALARIS Medical Systems for
repair. ALARIS Medical Systems does not
provide replacement components for repair of
SMT boards nor does ALARIS Medical
Systems recommend attempting field service
of the instrument's SMT circuit boards.
Full board assembly schematics are not
included with this service manual.
The AC off-line switcher and RS-232 boards
are replaced as an assembly. If a board is
determined to have failed, it is replaced with a
new board (for part number refer to “Illustrated
Parts Breakdown” chapter). ALARIS Medical
Systems does not provide replacement
components for repair of these boards.
Both single and dual channel instruments
function in the same manner; however, they
use two different main PCBs. The component
reference designations are therefore different
for each board. To help distinguish between
the single and dual channel instrument
reference designations in this chapter, the
dual channel instrument will be represented in
parenthesis; for example, (U13).

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 4-1
Technical Service Manual
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

4.2 GENERAL INFORMATION (Continued) the camshaft, and the administration set
section compressed by the cam followers.
The instrument contains a peristaltic
pumping mechanism and support circuitry to
4.3 OVERVIEW
ensure controlled flow. The peristaltic
mechanism consists of a linear array of 12 The instrument contains one main PCB and
cam followers which travel perpendicular to several modules that interface to it. The
the administration set. These cam followers interfacing modules are as follows:
act like "fingers" kneading the membrane.
• LED module
When the fluid-filled disposable is placed
against the array of cam followers, the • Graphic LCD module (MAIN)
coordinated, sinusoidal motion of the cams • Lower LCD module
causes a peristaltic wave of fluid • Battery
displacement in the instrumenting segment
• AC off-line switcher
of the disposable.
• Keypad
The instrument will alarm at signs of • Nurse Call / RS-232 board
internal problems and at preset thresholds
for external problems (for example, when • Motor
battery charge falls below a critical level, or • Air-in-line sensors
instrument output pressure exceeds a • Pressure module
programmed limit). All alarms provide visual • Motor rotation sensor and mechanism
and auditory signals to alert the operator. latch detector (optocouplers)
Accuracy of fluid delivery is a function of the • ECD board
microprocessor-controlled rotation cycle of

Figure 4-1. Main Block Diagram

AC DC/DC LOWER
OFFLINE POWER LCD
BATTERY
SWITCHER CHARGER SUPPLY

WATCHDOG
L

CPU KERNEL
BATTERY
MOTOR/ MECH
32 Mhz CPU / EPROM MANAGER
CONTROL
Y1 EEPROM / RAM TAMP
SW
LED
AIL KEY
MAIN PAD
ECD COMBO LCD
IC
AUDIO MAIN SPKR
RS232
AMP SPKR TEST
PRESS
SENSOR ADC VBKUP
VCC
BKUP SPKR
ADREF + SPKR TEST
1.0F
5.5V
L SUPER CAP

4-2 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

4.3 OVERVIEW (Continued) • User Interface Circuitry

The user interface circuitry connects to
The instrument power is supplied through
the keypad, LED modules, and LCD
the AC off-line switcher module and the
modules to the kernel circuitry for
battery.
monitoring and control. This circuitry
The main PCB contains all the control also contains the audio interface, and
circuitry required for the instrument. The audio test.
board can be broken down into four main
sections, as follows: 4.4 MAIN PCB
• CPU Kernel 4.4.1 CPU Kernel
The microprocessor, RAM, ROM, data
communication, and COMBO IC make The CPU kernel is responsible for
up the heart of the system. These are controlling the motor actuation, sensing and
collectively referred to as the CPU responding to user input, monitoring various
kernel. The CPU kernel is responsible system sensors, and performing start-up
for controlling the motor actuation, and on-going system operational testing.
sensing and responding to user input, The kernel is based on a 16-bit 80C188
monitoring various system sensors, and microprocessor U11 (U15), 1Mbytes of
performing start-up and ongoing system Flash EEPROM program storage, and 128K
operational testing. bytes of battery backed up RAM data
storage. In addition, the kernel has 2K bits
• Power System of EEPROM memory and a selectable
The power system is responsible for baud rate for serial communications
charging the battery, generating the DC interface.
power, displaying battery status and
performing watchdog (clock sync checks) The COMBO IC U10 (U14) is a custom
functions. The power system includes ASIC (Application Specific Integrated
the Battery Manager custom IC. Circuit) which incorporates timing, address
decoding, digital I/O, and other system
• Motor Drive and Sensor Control "glue" functions. The Combo IC has a 16-
The motor drive and sensor control bit CRC generator which is used to
circuitry drives the motors, the air-in-line periodically test the Flash EEPROM data.
sensors, the mechanism latch sensors, The COMBO IC also contains the local
and the rotation sensors. The circuit is serial interface control logic used to
also responsible for monitoring the interface to serially-accessed peripherals,
pressure sensors, the power supply such as the A/D, EEPROM, LED Module(s),
voltages, the motor current, and the air- and Battery Manager. Additional information
in-line sensor outputs. can be found in the section below "COMBO
IC".

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 4-3
Technical Service Manual
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

4.4 MAIN PCB (Continued) device through the serial data registers
within the COMBO chip.
4.4.1 CPU Kernel (Continued)
This device holds 256, 16-bit words. It is
The kernel data communications function used to store data that will not be destroyed
supports RS-232 level serial if power is lost to the instrument. The
communications up to 19200 baud. The EEPROM will store configuration mode,
UART function is embedded in the COMBO calibration (LCD contrast) settings, and
IC, while the RS-232 interface is based on certain diagnostic information e.g.,
an industry standard RS-232 level converter instrument ID number, PM interval, PM
chip. on/off, battery run time, and total instrument
run time.
4.4.2 COMBO IC
The COMBO IC, U10 (U14), is a 160-pin NOTE: The Guardrails® CQI log and Event
Log are NOT stored in the EEPROM.
PQFP device which supports a variety of
kernel functions, primary audio support,
4.4.4 RAM
digital I/O and other functions. The COMBO
latches the address bus and outputs the The RAM is used to store user set
latched addresses as A19-A16, and A7-A0. parameters, for example, volume to be
The COMBO lC has a 16-bit CRC generator infused (VTBI), mode, rate, and PRI/SEC,
which is used to periodically test the Flash as well as the logs. The instrument
EEPROM data. The RAMTEST circuit provides read/write memory integrity by
provides redundant storage and error using redundant storage and automatic
detection of RAM data. The local serial comparison. Data written to RAM is stored
interface control logic is used to interface in both of the RAM devices, main RAM, U8
with serial accessed peripherals; such as (U9), and phantom RAM, U4 (U5). The
the A/D converter, EEPROM, LED processor reads data directly from the main
Module(s), and Battery Manager. The RAM. The phantom RAM data only goes to
device also generates the Main LCD the COMBO IC. The COMBO IC compares
interface control signals. The UART (Intel the data from the two RAMs on each read.
8251 equivalent) and three 16-bit counters If the data does not match, a bit will be set
(Intel 8254 equivalent) are also provided in a register within the COMBO IC.
inside the COMBO chip. Six pulse width
modulators for motor control and LCD
backlight and contrast are also within the
custom IC.

4.4.3 EEPROM
The EEPROM is used to store all
configuration and diagnostic settings. The
EEPROM, U9 (U11) is accessed using the
serial control unit within the COMBO IC.
Data is written and read back from the

4-4 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

4.4 MAIN PCB (Continued) 4.4.6 RS-232 Interface

7130/7230 Models
4.4.4 RAM (Continued)
The RS-232 serial communications interface
When the instrument is off, the VRAM is supported by a UART which is located
supply is still on, preserving the contents of inside the COMBO IC. The UART is
the RAMs. The second chip select line, equivalent to an Intel 8251. The UART's
CS2, of the RAMs is tied to RST_CPU*, so outputs drive interface U22 (U45), which
that the RAMs can not be selected during converts the logic level signals to RS-232
power down sequence. levels. The system can support up to 19200
baud rate.
4.4.5 Flash EEPROM
The communications channel is EMI filtered
The Flash EEPROM, U42 (U48), contains and ESD protected to 10 kV with
1M bytes (x8) of program memory. The components on the RS-232/Nurse Call
Flash EEPROM is programmed through the board and is not electrically isolated. The
RS-232 interface. interface supports two signals (TxD and
RxD) along with ground.
Figure 4-2. COMBO IC Block Diagram
X1 Audio Tone
osc Audio Tone
Generator AMP3-0
Generator

Main CPU BKGND_IRPT

Background
Irp Timer

Motor Timer TIMER1_OUT

Chan A

Motor Timer TIMER0_OUT

Chan B
PWM1, PWM1_OUT6-5
Motor PWM PWM0, PWM0_OUT6-5
Chan A
PWM3, PWM3_OUT6-5
Motor PWM PWM2, PWM2_OUT6-5
Chan B
A19-16 PMW5 (LCD Contrast)
A191-161 PMW4 (LCD Backlight)
A7-0 LCD PWM
Kernel Bus AD7-0
Interface DMARQ0
Data CRC
Generator LCD-D7-0
LCD-CS1-0
LCD_RS
LCD Bus LCD_EN
Interface LCD_WR

IN-07-00 PD7-0
IN-17-10 RAM Test PH_EN
IN-33-30 RAMCS
Input Circuit
Ports
OUT-27-20
Output Ports OUT-36-34

TXD
UART

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 4-5
Technical Service Manual
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

4.4 MAIN PCB (Continued) signals and an isolation power transformer

for isolated circuit power. Voltage level
4.4.6 RS-232 Interface (Continued) conversions are generated by the
7131/7231 Models MAX25O/25 1 chip set, to generate the
The isolated RS-232 interface provides appropriate signal conditioning. The limit
500VAC electrical isolation between the resistor converts the RS-232 signal levels,
RS-232 signals on the RS-232 connector nominally ±6V, to match the input signal
and the rest of the instrument. The isolation range required by the chip set.
is created using optical isolators for the

Figure 4-3. Electrical Partitioning

Lower LCD Display
Rate & State Rate & State
Keypad Battery Gauge Bargraph
Info & Data Disp Indicators Indicators
27 keys 4 Alphanumeric Characters
128x64 Dot Matrix 8x7 LED Matrix 8x7 LED Matrix
(1 chan pump) 3 Audio icons
Controller IC Drive & Test Drive & Test
32 keys Computer Crt/mon icons
LED Backlight 5x8 Keypad Interface 5x8 Keypad Interface
(2 chan pump) Tamper icons
Channel A Channel B

MAIN
EEPROM
2K bit PCB
Combo IC Serial I/O
Motor Current Logic
Kernel Serial Intf Controller
80C188 CPU RAM Test Logic
Flash EPROM ROM CRC Logic Battery
128KB RAM LCD Interface Logic
Motor Control Motor Control Microprocessor Backup
32MHz Xtal Audio Tone Generator
PWM Stepper Interface PWM Stepper Interface Watchdog
Master Timebase Battery Charge Control
Audio
Motor Current Sense Motor Current Sense
Motor Timing Logic Battery Monitor Buzzer
Audio Sensor Interface Battery Gauge Interface
A/D Converter Rotation Flag Interface Rotation Flag Interface
Amplifier UART Power On/Off Control
12 Bit Resolution Latch Sensor Interface Latch Sensor Interface
8 Input Multiplexor

Air In Power Supply

RS232 HDWR
19200 Baud Line Vmotor (25V)
Backup
Vcc (5V)
RS232 Compatible Interface Power
Vram (5V)
VAO (5V Batt Proc) Source
Vneg (-15V)
Vpos (+6V)
Pressure
Sensor
Interface

Main
Speaker RS232 ESD Board Battery Charger
Pressure 4 Hour Charge Rate
RS232 Connector
Speaker Connector Sensor NiCad/NIMH
ESD Protection Interface Capable
Tamper
Switch Optional Nursecall/ECD Ckt

ECD Intf RS232 PCB

Optional
½ Connectors

Mechanism Assembly Mechanism Assembly

AC Input Stepper Motor Stepper Motor
IEC Power Tub Off Line Switching
Line Filter
Power Supply Sensors Sensors
Rotation Flag Rotation Flag
Integral Fuses
AIL Sensors AIL Sensors
100-240VAC 50/60Hz Pressure Sensor Pressure Sensor
Custom Module Latch Sensor Latch Sensor

Channel A Channel B

4-6 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

4.4 MAIN PCB (Continued) The Battery Manager has the following
functions:
4.4.6 RS-232 Interface (Continued)
• Instrument on/off
NOTE: The RS-232 board in Models • Battery charge control
7131/7231 does not have the Nurse Call
option. • Battery gauge
• Battery warning and alarm
4.5 POWER SYSTEM
• Real time clock
4.5.1 Battery Manager
• Displays configuration name
Refer to “Battery Management System” in
• Instrument icon display
“General Information” chapter.
• Inter-processor communications
The Battery Manager is a custom
programmed microcontroller with 4K of • Processor self test
ROM and 1K of RAM memory. The Battery • Error detection (battery, temperature
Manager has two system time bases, a input, current integrator, power on/off,
32 kHz crystal and a 4 MHz ceramic and watchdog faults)
resonator. In normal operation, the Battery
Manager operates at 4 MHz. Under low • In-circuit test
power condition (instrument is off and AC is
unplugged) the Battery Manager switches to
the lower frequency to save power. The
battery manager is turned on for three
seconds every minute when the instrument
is off and connected to AC power.

Figure 4-4. Battery Manager Block Diagram

AC Supply On/Off DC-DC

Control Converter

Charger
Lower
LCD Display
Voltage
Current Analog Battery
Circuits Watchdog
Temperature Manager

Main CPU
AC Power
Sensor On/Off
Switch

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 4-7
Technical Service Manual
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

4.5 POWER SYSTEM (Continued) The Battery Manager controls the average
current into the battery by varying the duty
4.5.2 AC Off-Line Switcher cycle of the charge control. There are four
Refer to Figures 4-5 "Battery Monitor" and possible phases for the average current
4-6 "Main Power Supply". charge cycle.

The AC off-line switcher is an AC to DC • Fast Charge: This phase charges at

power converter capable of running the 1 amp within limits on the ambient
instrument and supplying 22-24V @ 1.5A to temperature. The Battery Manager
the battery charging circuit from an input of charges with this phase until one of the
100-240 VAC 50/60 Hz. The module has following charge criteria are met.
foldback current limiting to protect against ♦ Battery voltage drops at least 192mV
output shorts. It contains two input fuses below the peak value.
which are designed for worst case hospital ♦ Battery temperature is more than 7°C
line transients and they will only blow if above starting temperature and at
there is a fault in the module. There are no least 30°C.
user adjustments in the module. ♦ Total charge time exceeds 3.2 hours.
• Top-Up Charge: This phase starts after
4.5.3 Battery Charge Regulator
fast charge if the battery temperature is
Refer to Figures 4-5 "Battery Monitor" and less than 37°C, at an average of 180mA
4-6 "Main Power Supply". for 180 minutes. This average current is
The battery charger circuit is a step-down produced by charging at 1 Ampere for
(buck type) switching regulator, U20 (U28), 0.9 seconds every 5 seconds.
configured to provide a constant current of
NOTE: The charger will turn off if the
1A through the battery whenever the charge battery gets too hot (>37° C) to let the
control signal, CHARGE*, is low. The input battery cool down. Cool down time is
to the battery charger regulator is NOT included in the 180-minute charge
DC_INPUT, which is generated by the time.
off-line switcher between 22-24V.
• Float Charge: This phase charges at an
The circuit measures the battery charge average current of 40mA in a fully
current through a 0.1 ohm resistor, R29 charged battery. This average current is
(R43), between the battery and "P" ground. produced by charging at 1A for 0.2
This voltage is amplified and sent to the second every 5 seconds.
feedback input of the switching regulator
• Hot Charge: This phase charges at a
U20 (U28). The regulator will keep the
rate of 180mA for a total time of 18 hours
voltage at the feedback pin at 1.23V by
if battery temperature is more than 36°C.
adjusting its output pulse width. The gain of
Charge stops above 43°C and starts
the amplifier is set so that an average
below 43°C. The cool down time is in
current of 1A through the 0.1 ohm sense
addition to the 18-hour charge time.
resistor will result in the 1.23V feedback
voltage.

4-8 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

4.5 POWER SYSTEM (Continued) NOTES:

4.5.4 Refresh Cycle Load • The instrument's operation, after the

battery is disconnected, is the same as
Refer to figures 4-5 "Battery Monitor" and the Battery Manager generating a
4-6 "Main Power Supply". SHUT_DOWN* signal and requires the
instrument to be plugged into AC after the
The battery refresh feature uses the refresh battery has been reconnected.
cycle load circuit to add an additional
resistive load across the battery. This • After reconnecting the battery and
connecting the instrument to AC, wait 15
accelerates the discharge when the
minutes before powering up.
instrument is plugged into AC and is either
on or off. When the SHUT_DOWN* signal is asserted
The signal DUMP_RES, generated by the low, Q37 (Q39) will turn off, which opens the
Battery Manager, is used to turn on the path from the battery to VAO_SOURCE.
transistor, Q9 (Q34), to apply the 47 ohm,
7 Watt, R273 (R353) load to the battery. 4.5.6 AC Line Sense
Refer to figures 4-5 "Battery Monitor" and
4.5.5 VAO Shutdown 4-6 "Main Power Supply".
Refer to figures 4-5 "Battery Monitor" and The AC power sense circuit detects the
4-6 "Main Power Supply". presence of AC power and notifies the user
VAO_SOURCE is used to supply power to and the Battery Manager of its status. The
the Battery Manager, its supporting circuitry DC_INPUT is the output of the AC off-line
and the RAMs. When the instrument is switcher and should be between 22 to 24V.
turned off, these supplies remain active. If When the input voltage, DC_INPUT,
AC is unplugged, and the battery has reaches at least 15V, the circuit will
decreased to approximately 9.75V, the recognize that AC has been plugged in.
Battery Manager has the ability to remove When AC power is detected, the AC LED on
these supplies from the battery load. This the LED module is lit and a status input to
circuit is designed to protect the battery by the Battery Manager, AC_PWR, is asserted
preventing the battery from getting fully high. The circuit is designed to switch off
discharged. The Battery Manager the LED quickly when AC power is removed.
generates the signal SHUT_DOWN* to When DC_INPUT is at least 15V, the
remove the VAO_SOURCE from the battery voltage through the sense circuit is high
load. When the SHUT_DOWN* command enough to turn on the AC LED within the
has been given the Battery Manager will LED module. The AC_LED signal will be
lose power, as well as the RAMs and Lower about 1.5 to 2.4V when the LED is on.
LCD display. This power will only be
restored when AC power is connected. 4.5.7 System Power Source Select
Refer to figures 4-5 "Battery Monitor" and
4-6 "Main Power Supply".

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 4-9
Technical Service Manual
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

4.5 POWER SYSTEM (Continued) When MEASURE is low, Q27 (Q43) will
open and remove BATT_PLUS from input to
4.5.7 System Power Source Select (Continued) U29 (U37). Also MEASURE, being low, will
The system power source, open Q26 (Q45) so that VMEAS is removed
DC_DC_SOURCE, is used to drive three as well.
switching power supplies. It is controlled by
the Battery Manager through the signal 4.5.9 VMEAS
PWR_ON. When the instrument is on, the Refer to figures 4-5 "Battery Monitor" and
DC_DC_SOURCE is normally supplied by 4-6 "Main Power Supply".
either the battery or the AC off-line switcher
if the instrument is plugged into AC. The VMEAS is the supply used to power the
Battery Manager disconnects the AC source REF 4.1V reference circuit, the voltage
during the battery refresh cycle. monitor circuit, and the current monitor
circuit. The Battery Manager turns VMEAS
When the Battery Manager asserts off by setting the MEASURE signal low
PWR_ON high, Q24 (Q41) will turn on. If when the instrument is off and AC is
PWR_AC is high, Q7 (Q25) will turn on, and unplugged to reduce the load on the battery.
DC_DC_SOURCE will be supplied by the In this condition, the Battery Manager turns
DC_INPUT. VMEAS on once a minute to check the
battery's voltage and temperature.
If PWR_AC is high, Q8 (Q21) is on and
DC_DC_SOURCE will be supplied by the The 12V Zener CR31 (CR41) is placed
battery. between the gate and source of the FET,
Q26 (Q45), to limit the gate to source
4.5.8 Battery Voltage Monitor voltage. The FET can see up to 24V but the
Refer to figures 4-5 "Battery Monitor" and Vgs (Voltage gate to source) of the FET is
4-6 "Main Power Supply". only rated to 20V.

The battery voltage can range from 10 to 4.5.10 Voltage Reference 4.1V
18V. The Battery Manager monitors the
Refer to figures 4-5 "Battery Monitor" and
battery voltage through its internal A/D
4-6 "Main Power Supply".
converter. The valid input range of the A/D
converter is 0 to 4.1V. The battery voltage The 4.1V reference is used in the voltage
must be reduced to meet the input monitor circuit, the battery temperature
requirements. The 4.1V reference and the sensor circuit, the ambient temperature
voltage subtracter-multiplier amplifier circuit sensor circuit, and is the reference voltage
U29-5 (U37-5) scale the battery voltage and for the A/D converter in the Battery
maintain an accuracy of ±15 counts Manager. The reference voltage is
(1 count = lmV). 4.096V ±2%. VMEAS, which can be
between 7.7 to 24V, turns on the precision
The Battery Manager uses the battery
reference Zener U27 (U47).
voltage for its charging, battery gauge, error
detection, and battery alarm and warning
features.

4-10 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

4.5 POWER SYSTEM (Continued) • battery gauge

• gauge updates under present power
4.5.11 System Current Monitor
requirements
Refer to figures 4-5 "Battery Monitor" and
• error detection functions
4-6 "Main Power Supply".
The circuit to measure the supply current 4.5.12 Always On Supply (+5VAO)
uses a 0.1 ohm resistor, R32 (R86), to Refer to figures 4-5 "Battery Monitor" and
generate a voltage drop. The resistor is 4-6 "Main Power Supply".
placed between "P" ground, the ground from
the AC off-line switcher, and "L" ground, the The always on supply, U39 (U43), is used to
ground to the rest of the instrument (battery power devices that remain powered when
charger circuit is tied to "P" ground so that the instrument is off, for example, Battery
battery charge current is not measured as Manager circuitry and VRAM. The supply is
system load current). The amplifier, U29-7 regulated at 5V ±5%.
(U37-7), is designed as an integrator.
Because the "P" ground voltage will be less 4.5.13 System Switching Supplies
than the "L" ground voltage, a current will be Refer to figures 4-5 "Battery Monitor" and
generated in a resistor tied to the 4-6 "Main Power Supply".
operational amp's negative input, to
maintain equal voltage levels at the The system switching supplies provide
operational amp inputs. This current regulated +5V, +29V, and -15V power to the
charges the feedback capacitor, C52 (C56), logic, display, motor, and sensor circuits.
thereby integrating the current as long as Each of the supplies uses an integrated
the feedback transistor, Q30 (Q48), is off. switching regulator IC which provides
thermal overload protection, internal
The Battery Manager integrates the current oscillator, internal reference, and current
for 100 ms, 1 ms before resetting the limit functionality. The DC_DC_SOURCE
integrator by pulsing the signal RESET_I voltage is applied to three switching power
high for 1 ms. Forcing RESET_I high will supplies:
turn on Q30 (Q48) thereby placing a short
across the feedback capacitor, C52 (C56). • +5V supply U17 (U31): A step-down
The resulting output voltage, I_MON, is fed ("buck") configuration switching regulator
to an A/D input of the Battery Manager. At a which provides a lower output voltage
1 A load current the output voltage is about (5V ±5%) than input voltage (10V-24V).
2.7V. The Battery Manager samples I_MON The supply can provide in excess of 1A
once before the RESET_I signal is pulsed peak. Output clamp Zener diodes limit
high and once after. The difference circuit damage in the event of regulator
between the two samples becomes the failure.
current measurement. The Battery Manager
uses the current measured for the following:
• charging
• to monitor current in and out of battery

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 4-11
Technical Service Manual
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

4.5 POWER SYSTEM (Continued) internal pass element shorts the output
side of the power inductor to ground,
4.5.13 System Switching Supplies then releases it, generating about 29V at
(Continued) the cathode of a diode. This voltage is
The regulator has an internal pass sensed by a resistor pair and the loop
element which turns on current to the controlled to generate a 1.23V reference
output inductor until the output voltage, signal level.
as sensed through the sense resistors, • VNEG supply U16 (U30): A buck-boost
reaches the internal 1.23V reference supply which generates a negative
voltage. It then turns off and the inductive supply (-15V ±1V) from a positive supply
flyback voltage created is clamped by a (9V-24V). The supply can provide about
catch diode. 100mA. The IC ground pin is
• VMOTOR supply U21 (U26): A step-up bootstrapped to the negative output
("boost") supply which provides a higher voltage. Then, referencing the feedback
output voltage (29V ±1.5V) than the input signal to ground potential allows the chip
supply (9V-24V). The supply can provide to sense the negative voltage and
up to 1A peak and has a soft start feature therefore regulate it.
to limit inrush current upon starting. The

Figure 4-5. Battery Monitor

DC_INPUT (22-24V) AMB TEMP

SHUT_DOWN* CR31 (CR41) VREF

4.1V T TH1 (TH1)

BATTERY_PLUS (10-18V) VAO_SOURCE VMEAS (9-24V) L

12V BATT_TEMP R273 Q26 (Q45)
Battery Q37 (Q39)
1.8AH (R353)
Charger
U20 (U26) 47 OHM VREF
(Part of MEASURE Battery
7W 4.1V
T Battery
DUMP_RES U27 (U47) Voltage
Assembly) Monitor
- V_MON
L 6
CHARGE +
Q27 (Q43) U29 (U37)
Battery L RESET_I
R29 (R43)
Current 0.1 OHM L
Sense
Q30 (Q48)

System R32 (R86)

Current 0.1 OHM C52 (C56)
Sense -
7 I_MON
+
Battery
P L U29 (U37) Current
Monitor
Ground difference
between switcher
and logic gives
current.

4-12 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

Figure 4-6. Main Power Supply

AC Line AC_PWR
sense
AC_LED
AOD_BKLT
Q15 (Q47)
VMOTOR
PWR_AC Voltage (29V)
L
PWR_ON Reg
U21 (U26) L
VNEG
DC_INPUT (22-24V) DC_DC_SOURCE
Voltage (-15V)
(9-24V) VPOS
Q7 (Q20) Reg DC_DC_SOURCE
U16 (U30) (6V)
BATT_PLUS Q24 (Q41) VMEAS +6V
(10-18V)
Q8 (Q21) ADVREF_RAW
DC_INPUT (22-24V) MEASURE VREF
4.1V U2 (U1)
U41 (U2)
AC Battery Voltage
Charger VRAM +5VAO VBKUP
Offline Reg
U20 (U28) Q37 (Q39) (4.8V) (5V) (5V)
Switcher Q26 (Q45) U17 (U31)

85-264VAC 12V
Voltage +
50/60 Hz 1.8AH 1F
Reg 5.5V
Input
U39 (U43)
L L
VAO_SOURCE 7.6-24V
Voltage
Reg
SHUT_DOWN* VBKUP_SRC_EN* U31 (U44) VBKUP_SRC_TST*

4.5 POWER SYSTEM (Continued) 4.5.15 VPOS Supply

Refer to figures 4-5 "Battery Monitor" and
4.5.13 System Switching Supplies
4-6 "Main Power Supply".
(Continued)
In operation, the internal pass element A linear regulator, U2 (U1), from a DC-DC
provides current through the inductor Source provides a 7.5V supply for the
while on. When the pass element turns pressure transducer and A/D circuits. The
off, the flyback action of the inductor power is supplied by the DC_DC_
generates a negative voltage spike which SOURCE.
is captured across a capacitor though a
steering diode. 4.5.16 Battery Temperature Sensor
Refer to figures 4-5 "Battery Monitor" and
4.5.14 VRAM Supply 4-6 "Main Power Supply".
Refer to figures 4-5 "Battery Monitor" and The battery temperature sense circuit
4-6 "Main Power Supply". measures the temperature in the battery
The VRAM supply is a 4.8V supply pack through a nominal 10 kilohm @ 25°C
generated for the RAMs to keep them active thermistor. The sensor will measure, with a
when the instrument is turned off. When the 2.5°C accuracy, over the temperature range
instrument is off, VRAM is sourced by 0° to 65°C. The circuit is a voltage divider
+5VAO through a diode. When the between a resistor and the thermistor with a
instrument is on, VRAM is sourced by +5V 4.1V reference voltage used as the input
through a diode. voltage. The output BATI_TEMP drives an
A/D input to the Battery Manager.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 4-13
Technical Service Manual
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

4.5 POWER SYSTEM (Continued) • Continuous High: Instrument is off or

watchdog error has been caused by the
4.5.16 Battery Temperature Sensor Main Processor.
(Continued)
• Continuous Low: Battery Manager
The Battery Manager uses the battery detects an error within the Battery
temperature in its error detection and Manager itself.
charging functions.
• Oscillating at 10 Hz.: Instrument is on
or no watchdog errors have occurred.
4.5.17 System Watchdog
When the 10 Hz signal begins to oscillate
Refer to figure 4-7 "System Watchdog".
the watchdog outputs, WD_OUT and
The system watchdog provides a monitor on WD_OUT* will be deactivated. The one
the operation of the Main Processor and the shot, U36-9 (U46-13), keeps its output Q
Battery Manager. It also provides an high as long as the falling edges of the
independent clock signal to the Main signal (10 Hz*) are faster than the pulse
Processor for continuous comparison with width of the pulse generated by R245
the main time base. The Battery Manager (R323) and C49 (C67), which is 105 to
controls an output signal (10 Hz) that 220 ms. The Q* output of the one shot,
performs multiple functions. U36-12 (U46-4), disables the second one
shot U36-13 (U46-5). The second one shot
The 10 Hz* has three states:
is only enabled when the watchdog is in
alarm.
Figure 4-7. System Watchdog

10 Hz* 10 Hz To Main Processor

4 MHz Resonator
Battery
Manager
32.768 KHz U34 (U40) PWR_ON
RESET* D Q

10 Hz
U36 (U46)
13 (5)
+5V Q
Q*
PWR_SW_VAO* (A/B*) R
CLK
R245 (R323) U40 (U39)

Q*
C49 (C67) CL*

L U36 (U46)
5 (13) WD_OUT*
Q

9 (1)
CLK NCALL_WD*
12 (4)
Q* Q35 (Q49)

WD_OUT

4-14 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

4.5 POWER SYSTEM (Continued) sending a 4 to 11 ms pulse to the Battery

Manager reset input. This allows the user to
4.5.17 System Watchdog (Continued) reset the Battery Manager through hardware
When 10 Hz* is not oscillating, the one shot, when the Battery Manager is stuck in a
U36-5 (U46-13), will not trigger, therefore, watchdog error. The system power is also
output Q is low and Q* is high. The turned off at this time because the pulse
watchdog outputs, WD_OUT* and resets the power latch,U40-9 (U39-9),
WD_OUT, are activated until the Battery bringing PWR_ON low.
Manager releases them, by generating the The 10 Hz* signal also goes to an interrupt
10 Hz* output. The NCALL_WD* signal is input of the Main Processor. It is used to
also brought low because WD_OUT turns compare the time base of the Main
on Q35 (Q49). Whenever the 10 Hz* stops Processor with the time base of the Battery
oscillating and is high, a watchdog error has Manager. Nominally, the timebase is
occurred within the Battery Manager itself. 100 ms ±1 ms from falling edge to falling
The 10 Hz* signal being high, prevents edge.
clock pulses to U36-9 (U46-1) and the one
shot to time-out so the output Q (WD_OUT*) 4.5.18 Power Switch (refer to Figure 4-8)
goes to zero and Q* (WD_OUT) goes to a
high. Once WD_OUT is high, the second The power on/off switch(es) are located on
one shot, U36-13 (U46-5), is enabled. the keypad. The switch(es) are not included
in the standard keypad matrix. One (Two)
If the user presses either on/off switch, output(s) is generated, PWR_SW*
U29-10 (U42-10) output will go high, (PWR_SW_A/B*), one for each channel.

Figure 4-8. System Reset/Power On

VBKUP
Battery Manager
U34 (U40)
100K

R61 INV
PWR_SW* (A/B*) PWR_SW_VAO* (A/B*)
On/Off INT1*
Switch(s) 100 100K (INT2*) RST_CPU*

R62
1 uF
PWR-ON
Keypad U40 (U39)
L
9
Q

CLK
Power Latch
Q*
R
U40 (U39) reset by 8 Msec pulse from U36-13
(U46-5) when power switch pressed to remove U36 (U46)
power from instrument.
13 (5)
Q

CLK
WD Alarm Enables U36-13 (U46-5)

R
WD_OUT*

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 4-15
Technical Service Manual
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

4.5 POWER SYSTEM (Continued) 4.5.20 Lower LCD Display Backlight Drive
The backlight for the Lower LCD display
4.5.18 Power Switch (Continued)
contains 6 LEDs in series. The signal
The signals are pulled up to 5V, by VBKUP AOD_BKLT is tied to the anode of the first
supply, through two pull-up resistors. LED in the series. Each led has about a 2V
(VBKUP is the supply for the backup audio.) forward drop. So AOD_BKLT will be about
These signals are decoupled from the 12-13V when the LEDs are turned on.
signals that drive the Battery Manager logic,
PWR_SW* (PWR_SW_A/B*), through two The Lower LCD display backlight drive
100K resistors. The PWR_SW* circuit controls the amount of current
supplied to the LEDs. The circuit contains
(PWR_SW_A/B*) signals drive interrupt two current sources "or'd" together. One
inputs in the Battery Manager, U34 (U40), current source is powered from DC_INPUT,
and are used by the error reset and power the voltage supply from the AC off-line
on circuits. Upon recognition of the power switcher. The second source is powered
switch, the Battery Manager controls when from VMOTOR which is generated when the
the Main Processor and the rest of the instrument is on.
circuit will receive power.
The circuit has four modes of operation:
4.5.19 System Reset/Power On • The instrument is off and unplugged. In
(refer to Figure 4-8) this mode, the backlight driver is off and
System Reset is controlled by the Battery the two power supplies that drive the
Manager. Either the lack of a reset inactive circuit are both off.
signal from the Battery Manager, U34 (U40), • The instrument is off but plugged into AC.
signal R61 or the lack of the PWR_ON In this mode, the current to the LEDs is
signal being asserted will initiate a limited by a resistor. VMOTOR will not
RST_CPU*. be on, so only the DC_INPUT path
Power on is also controlled by the Battery generates the current for the LEDs and
Manager. Under normal conditions the the current to the LEDs will be about
Battery Manager uses its output R62 to 4 mA.
toggle the power latch, U40-9 (U39-9), to • The instrument is on and plugged into
turn the instrument on/off. The Battery AC. In this mode, both current sources
Manager turns PWR_ON high when the are on, driving the LEDs for maximum
instrument is on and turns PWR_ON low brightness, and the current to the LEDs
when the instrument is off. should be around 6 mA.
If the instrument is on and a watchdog error • The instrument is on and not plugged
is active, WD_OUT* is asserted low. The into AC. In this mode, only VMOTOR is
second one shot, U36-13 (U46-5), will be on, so the driver generates the current to
enabled. When the power switch is pressed, turn on the LEDs and the current to the
an 8 ms pulse is generated at the Q output LEDs should be around 2 mA.
of U36-13 (U46-5). The pulse resets the
power latch, U40-9 (U39-9).

4-16 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

4.6 MOTOR DRIVE/SENSORS comparator will turn the high side switch
back on.
4.6.1 Motor Drive (refer to Figure 4-9)
The comparator circuit has been
The stepper motor drive circuit consists of a designed with a fixed turn on delay of 50
dual H bridge to provide voltage to each microseconds. This is a result of the RC
winding of the hybrid stepper motor, and a network on the output of the sense
voltage comparator to control the duration comparator stage. A second comparator
that voltage is applied to each motor stage will sense when the output of the
winding. first stage rises above 3.3 volts. The turn
on delay results in a maximum chopping
The sequence of operation for a single
frequency of 20 kHz. The lowest
phase [Phase 1 (A)] of the motor is as
chopping frequency is a function of the
follows:
motor current, at a maximum motor
1. Phase A, MTR_PH_1 (MTRA_PH_1) is current of 240 milliampere, the chopping
active, which causes the high side switch frequency is 14 kHz. Inserted between
and low side switch (diagonally opposite the sense resistor and the comparator
the high side switch), to close. This input is an RC network needed for
presents the motor supply voltage across filtering of the short circuit current caused
the motor winding. The MTR_1A by the distributed capacitance of the
(MTRA_IA) and MTR_1B (MTRA_1B) motor winding.
signals are used to drive the motor.
4. The chopping action results in a steady
2. Current will begin to increase at a rate state current in the winding for a given
determined by the ratio of the motor phase duration. When the phase is
voltage to the inductance of the motor; reversed the opposite high side and low
for example, about 0.5 amps/millisecond, side switch will turn on. This forces
and flow in the direction indicated by the current to flow in the opposite direction.
arrow shown. The current will increase in The reference, MTR_l1 (MTRA_I_1), is
the sense resistor at the same rate and controlled to ramp the motor current
result in a voltage sensed by the exponentially, minimizing step oscillation
comparator. and reducing mechanical noise.
3. Once the sense resistor voltage MTR_I1
(MTR A/B_I_1) rises above the reference
voltage at the comparator inputs, U14
(U27), the comparator output, U14-1
(U27-7), will switch low forcing the high
side switch to open. The low side switch
will always remain closed until a phase
change occurs. With the supply voltage
now removed from the coil, the coil
current and the sense resistor current will
decay. Once the sense resistor voltage
drops below the reference voltage, the

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 4-17
Technical Service Manual
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

4.6 MOTOR DRIVE/SENSORS (Continued) To activate the following circuit requires

MTR_PH_1 (MTRA_PH_1), MTR_EN_1
4.6.1 Motor Drive (Continued) (MTRA_EN_1), and WD_OUT* to be at a
logic high. When the second comparator
The following table illustrates the phase
output U14-7 (U27-1) switches low, this
sequence and the respective power, high
turns on transistor Q18 (Q23), which
side and low side switches that are
turns off Q4 (Q17) immediately, thereby
enabled.
removing the motor voltage from the
Table 4-1. Motor Control Signals motor winding. When U14-7 (U27-1)
switches high, this causes the output of
Control Signal Logic Active Winding
comparator U13-7 (U25-1) to switch low
Logic State Switches Effected and transistor Q18 (Q23) to turn off. This
quickly turns on Q4 (Q17). A 1000 pF
capacitor is in series with the output of
MTR_EN_1 H Q4-6, Q3-1
U13-7 (U25-1) to speed up the switching
MTR_PH_1 L (Q17-6), (Q19-3) MTR_1A/B time of Q4 (Q17) when the comparator
output goes low. Two motor current
MTR_EN_2 H Q6-6, Q5-3 sense comparators are included in the
motor drive circuit to provide a means for
MTR_PH_2 L (Q8-6), (Q10-3) MTR_2A/B
the instrument to detect an instrument
MTR_EN_1 H Q4-7, Q3-3 malfunction that results in a “watchdog”
alarm that will shut off current to the
MTR_PH_1 H (Q17-7), (Q19-1) MTR_1A/B motor. The WD_OUT* signal, when at a
logic low, is the indicator for a "watchdog"
MTR_EN_2 H Q6-5, Q5-1 alarm. When motor current of
MTR_PH_2 H (Q8-7), (Q10-1) MTR_2A/B
approximately 20 milliampere or greater
flows through either motor winding the
motor current sense comparator output
To assist the down stream pressure MTR_SNS*, U12-7/U12-1
algorithm and reduce mechanical noise, (U17- 1/U17-7), will be at a logic low.
the motor is stepped in packets, a series Both motor windings would have to have
of motor steps followed by a short resting a motor current of less than 100
period. milliampere for the motor current sense
comparator output to go to a logic high.
5. The efficiency of the motor driver is
determined by the low on resistance in
the MOSFET switches, and the speed at
which they are switched on and off.
Since only the high side switches are
involved in regulating the motor current, a
bipolar network has been designed
around these switches to keep switching
times below a microsecond. An example
of a switching sequence is described as
follows:

4-18 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

Figure 4-9. Motor Drive Circuit, Phase 1(A)

V+

MTR_I1 U14 (U27)

(MTRA_I_1)
+
AMP Q17 (Q25)
- Q4 (17)
Q18 (Q23)
PHASE A*

PHASE A Motor Coil A

MTR_1A MTR_1B
(MTRA_1A) (MTRA_1B)
MTR_PH_1
(MTRA_PH_1)
VIA U13-7 (U25-1)
Q19 (Q26) Q16 (Q24)
Q3 (19)

PHASE A* PHASE A

MTR_SNS*

U12 (U17)
Sense Resistor
Sense Comparators

Figure 4-10. Motor and Mechanism Sensors Block Diagram

WD_OUT

MOTOR_CURRENT_1_A/B MOTOR_COIL_1A_A/B
COMBO IC Stepper
PWM Output MOTOR_CURRENT_2_A/B
MOTOR_COIL_1B_A/B Motor
Coil 1
Constant
MOTOR_PHASE_1_A/B
Current MOTOR_COIL_2A_A/B
Motor Stepper
MOTOR_PHASE_1_A/B
Driver Motor
MOTOR_COIL_2B_A/B
Coil 2
MOTOR_EN_1_A/B

MOTOR_EN_1_A/B

Motor MOTOR_CURRENT_SENSE A
COMBO IC Current
Digital Output Sense

Mechanism COMBO IC
MOTOR_FLAG_EN MOTOR_FLAG_A/B
Rotation Digital Output
Sensor

Mechanism
LATCH_FLAG_EN MOTOR_LATCH_A/B
Latch
Sensor

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 4-19
Technical Service Manual
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

4.6 MOTOR DRIVE/SENSORS (Continued) then returned to the COMBO IC and

eventually to the processor to determine if
4.6.2 Air-in-Line Sensor (refer to Figure 4-11) air is present (no signal) and to compute the
The Air-in-Line (AlL) Detector System size of the air bubble. With accumulator on,
consists of: the instrument will consider air bubbles
separated by less than 70 microliters of fluid
• Transmitter arm that also loads set in as one bubble and alarm accordingly. The
position to monitor for air. instrument will also alarm if 10% to 15% of
• Receiver which is mounted in downstream tubing is filled with air (varies
mechanism. with alarm set point).

• Voltage control oscillator (VCO). 4.6.3 Transducer (refer to Figure 4-12)

• COMBO IC and associated circuits. The transducer assembly is a silicon based
The voltage control oscillator will sweep a resistor bridge producing a linear output.
frequency range of 1 to 4 MHz and serve as The sensing area is in the front of the
the excitation for the ultrasonic AIL assembly and directly in contact with the
transducer. This frequency sweep is tubing (no gel). It is used to measure
necessary to ensure that the piezoceramic stress, not absolute pressure. A film over
elements will achieve resonance over the transducer provides a means to protect
assembly and temperature variances. The the sensor from electrostatic discharge.
AIL Gate signal will initiate the VCO to The transducer is used to sense upstream
sweep. The detector is scanned at a and downstream occlusions as well as
10 msec rate (40 msec to check bubble) sensing if the set is installed or removed. To
and once a second to test the AIL hardware. accomplish these tasks the transducer is
On the receiver side, the signal envelop will calibrated with a special set. The pressure
be seen if fluid is in the set. This signal is
Figure 4-11. Air-in-Line Detector Block Diagram

COMBO IC AIL_GATE
Digital Output AIL_TEST

1-4 MHz AIL_DRVP_A/B Signal

AIL_RCV_A/B AIL_SIG_A/B COMBO IC
Swept Voltage Ultrasonic Receiver
Digital Input
Controlled AIL_DRVN_A/B Sensor and Latch
Oscillator

Figure 4-12. Pressure Sensor Interface Block Diagram

Pressure
COMBO IC PRES_TST_A/B PRES_A/B Inverting
PRES_SIG_A/B
12-Bit A/D
Transducer
Digital Output Buffer Converter
Assembly

4-20 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

4.6 MOTOR DRIVE/SENSORS (Continued) channel instrument. The keyboard is

scanned approximately every 10 ms and
4.6.3 Transducer (Continued) key data updated when there is a change
calibration set has a hole drilled into the due to any key or keys being pressed or
dome of the AccuSlide® Flow Regulator. This released. Note that the panel lock is
enables the pressure to be applied directly scanned as part of the scan sequence even
to the transducer for calibration (0 and 500 though it is located on the back of the
mmHg). instrument. Switches are scanned every
10 msec, two cycles are required to be a
After pressure calibration, the reading true switch actuation. This provides a
shown in the diagnostic mode for the sensor debounce function to eliminate mechanical
is corrected for any offset /stress from noise and EMI/RFI interference. The power
loading the set outside of the pressure switch(es) are sensed separately by the
sensing area. Battery Manager. During normal operation,
the power switch(es) are monitored like the
When the set is installed, with dome intact,
other keys so that inadvertent instrument
the instrument looks for an increase in
turnoff can be avoided. In a system alarm
stress (greater than 55 mmHg with auto
state (for example, watchdog alarm active),
zero enabled, >90 mmHg with auto zero
the keys directly control turning power off to
disabled). Drift is checked periodically to
the instrument.
ensure the transducer is accurate. If not, a
"Cal Reqd" message will appear. This is The user output interface consists of three
done by asking the operator to remove the display modules. The LED Module(s)
set before powering down the instrument. provide rate data visible from a distance,
The time period of this test is selectable in along with operating mode annunciators,
the diagnostic mode under the Self Check AC/Battery operation notice, and visual
timer. alarm indication. The Graphic LCD Module
provides user information on a 128x64 dot
PRES_TST_A/B is used to take the
matrix display with LED backlight. The
transducer out of balance by inducing a
Lower LCD display shows the current
known positive offset. This is the means by
battery charge level along with the current
which the transducer is tested.
audio level selected, communications
The "Cal Reqd" message will appear if the interface status, panel lock status, and
transducer shifts more than 170 counts battery refresh status.
positive or 200 counts negative from last "0"
cal level.

4.7 USER INTERFACE (refer to Figure 4-13)

The user input interface consists of a
keyboard organized as a 4x8 matrix which is
scanned and controlled through the LED
Module on a single channel instrument and
the Channel A LED Module on the dual

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 4-21
Technical Service Manual
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

4.7 USER INTERFACE (Continued) verified at power up. The speaker audio
volume settings are approximately:
4.7.1 Main Speaker Driver
(refer to Figure 4-14) Low = min 45 dB
Med = 65 dB
The main speaker driver is based on an Hi = approx. 70 dB
LM386 low voltage speaker drive chip, U32
(U29), driven by an exponentially weighted 4.7.2 Backup Audio Buzzer and Test Circuit
4-bit control signal (AMP 0 to 3) modulated (refer to Figure 4-15)
at the desired frequency (200 Hz - 4 kHz) by
A backup audio generation capability is
the COMBO IC U10 (U14). The speaker is
provided to allow the instrument to generate
pulsed at 3 to 50 mA with a 50% duty cycle
an audible alarm in the event that the main
(max. 100 mA). The driver has a fixed 26dB
speaker is unable to do so. It is supplied
gain which provides up to 3VPP AC coupled
through VBKUP, a 1.0 Farad "supercap"
into an 8Ω speaker. The speaker is tested
C146 (C179) energy storage device
by monitoring the speaker current with a
charged by a 5V linear regulator, U32 (U44),
0.511Ω resistor.
on the VAO SOURCE supply. The buzzer is
The voltage across the resistor is amplified, a self oscillating audio generator and
rectified, and compared to low and high speaker module which produces a 3 to
threshold values by a window comparator, 4 kHz tone when energized. A logic circuit,
U38 (U16). The speaker is tested when an U30 (U41), powered by VBKUP arms the
alarm or error occurs, while the test circuit is circuit using the BKUP_ALARM_ARM signal

Figure 4-13. User Interface Block Diagram

LCD_D7-0

LCD_C31/2
COMBO IC
LCD LCD_EN

Interface LCD_WR
LED
LCD_RS
Backlit
Graphic
5-Bit PWM to LCD
BKLT_LED LED_CATH
0-200mA Module
COMBO IC LED Drive
PWM
Output LCD_CONT 8-Bit PWM to
VEE
-7V to -11V
Converter

BCLK BATT_IRPT

SEQ23-0
COMBO IC
Lower Digital Input
Battery COMM-1 Display
COMBO IC Processor
Serial SDI_BATT
Control COMBO IC
Unit SDO KYBD_IRPT
Serial
SDI_LED
Control
LED_CS_A/B LED
Unit
Module KEY_COL_4-0
SCLK Front
and Rear
WD_OUT KEY_ROW_7-0
Keypads

4-22 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

4.7 USER INTERFACE (Continued) operating buzzer. The buzzer current is

sampled by a sense resistor, whose voltage
4.7.2 Backup Audio Buzzer and Test Circuit is amplified. The DC level is compared to
(Continued) VTHRES Hi by a comparator, U33 (U33),
whose output (BKUP_SPKR_TST*) drives a
once the instrument has powered up so that digital input on the COMBO IC.
the watchdog WD_OUT* signal will not
generate an alarm if the unit is turned on or 4.8 LED MODULE
off properly. Additional logic is provided to The LED Module(s) provide rate data, along
allow the power switch(es) to turn off the with operating mode annunciators,
backup audio if the main CPU or battery AC/Battery operation notice, and visual
processor no longer have control over the alarm indication. The modules have 58
instrument. individual LEDs controlled by a custom IC.
The IC performs LED scanning and test
The circuit has two test functions. The
functions along with keyboard scanning
VBKUP supply is tested at power up to
circuits and interfaces to the main CPU
verify that the supercap can drive the buzzer
through the local serial interface. The LED
when the regulator is disabled through
intensity is controlled by the Main Processor
VBKUP_SRC_EN signal. The buzzer
to limit power use while running on battery.
operation is tested by sensing the oscillating
current waveform generated by a normally

Figure 4-14. Main Speaker

Rear Case
COMBO U32 (U29)
IC AMP 0 to 3
+
SPKR_POS
3 to 50 mamp SUM AMP
U10 (U14) +
- Main Speaker
2KHz
-
SPKR_NEG

L VTHRES HI
+ MAIN_SPKR_TST

+ U38 (U16)
OP AMP Window
R58 (R351) Comparator
-
0.511 OHM
U37 (U32)
Gain = 37
L L
+
VTHRES LOW
-

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 4-23
Technical Service Manual
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

Figure 4-15. Backup Audio

VBKUP
4.9 to 5.1V

VAO_SOURCE
5V REG
VBKUP_SRC_EN* U31 (U44)
+
C146 (C179) Super cap takes up to 30 minutes
Super Cap to charge and lasts from 11 minutes
1.0F to 2 hours.
5.5V
L

PWRSW_VBKUP
U30 (U41)

BKUP_ALARM_ARM Digital Q12 (Q29)

Logic
WD_OUT*

+ SPKR2
3 to 4 Khz
-

U37 (U32) VTHRES HI

+
-
BKUP_SPKR_TST*
OP AMP
-
100 OHM +
U33 (U33)
L
GAIN=14

4.9 LOWER LCD DISPLAY was generated to find and avoid problems.
Screen updates occur every 100 mSec.
The Lower LCD Display is visible whether
The backlight intensity is controlled by the
the instrument is on or off, AC or battery
Main Processor to limit power use while
operation. It shows the current battery
running on battery. The LCD contrast is
charge available along with the current
controlled by the main CPU and can be
audio level selected, communications
adjusted from factory default through the
interface status, panel lock status, and
diagnostics mode. Refer to "Changing Main
battery refresh status. It is driven by the
LCD Contrast" section in “Troubleshooting”
Battery Manager and is back lit when the
chapter.
instrument is on or plugged into AC.
Figure 4-16. Lower LCD Display
4.10 MAIN LCD MODULE
The Main LCD Module provides user

GOLD
information on a 128x64 dot matrix display
with LED backlight. The Main Processor MNTR
generates all text and symbols in bit
mapped form, then compares data read
back from the display memory to that which

4-24 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

4.10 MAIN LCD MODULE (Continued) 4.13 ECD BOARD (refer to Figure 4-17)
The ECD board (optional for 7130/7230)
4.10.1 Main LCD Backlight
provides empty container detection using
The graphic LCD backlight is an array of standard ALARIS® Model 180 Flow
LEDs driven by an adjustable constant Sensors.
current source controlled by a PWM signal
from the COMBO IC. The LED current can The flow sensor interface is a separate
be adjusted stepwise linearly over a board assembly which drives a standard
0-200 mA range. The current source ALARIS® Model 180 Flow Sensor, performs
consists of a low on resistance FET, 0.511Ω ambient light rejection on the resulting
sense resistor, and op amp to set the sense signals, and provides digital output signals
resistor voltage based on the filtered PWM for a detected drop and sensor attached
input voltage BKLT_LED. The backlight detection. The board consists of 2 separate
intensity is not user adjustable. ambient light discriminator loops and drop
detectors for independent Model 180 Flow
4.10.2 Graphic LCD Contrast Sensors along with common timing and
control logic. The board assembly is
The graphic LCD contrast is controlled by common to both single and dual channel
varying the VNEG supply to the module instruments, where the "B" channel is not
over a -7V to -11V range. The drive circuit available externally and is ignored in the
inverts and scales the filtered PWM software of the single channel instruments.
LCD_CONT signal from the COMBO IC to Note that the "A" channel is used for both
cover this range. Nominally, the contrast the "A" channel in the dual channel
voltage is -9V, but can be adjusted through instrument as well as the single channel
Diagnostics Mode in software. instrument, even though the mechanisms
are on opposite sides of the case.
4.11 NURSE CALL CIRCUIT
(7130/7230 ONLY) • Common Timing Logic:
The common timing and control logic
An optional nurse call circuit is located on generates the necessary discriminator
the RS-232/Nurse Call board and provides a timing signals to drive the flow sensor
35V @ 1A rated relay contact on system LED and sample signals representing
alarms through pins 6 and 9 of the RS-232 room ambient light and LED driven light
connector. outputs from the flow sensor. The main
system CLK_32MHz is used as the
4.12 PANEL LOCK SWITCH timebase and decade counter U3 that
The instrument can be protected from generates non-overlapping "A" and "B"
unauthorized changes with the Panel Lock channel drive and sense signals. This
Switch. A lock symbol is shown in the reduces the peak LED current load and
Lower LCD display whenever the feature is flow sensor crosstalk during normal
active. When activated, access to all front operation. Transistors Q5 and Q6 provide
panel keys is restricted (except channel logically inverted control signals for the
select and split screen viewing key). LED drive circuits.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 4-25
Technical Service Manual
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

4.13 ECD BOARD (Continued) To prevent a drop from skewing the LED
drive signal, a long time constant filter,
• Ambient Light Discriminator Loop:
consisting of CR1/CR2, R31/R13, and
The flow sensor drive current is set to
C9/C10, is enabled on a negative going
maintain a 2.8V level normally at
output signal DROP_A/B.
DROP_A/B. This level is determined by
the difference in input signal from a • Drop Detector:
Model 180 Flow Sensor when the emitter The drop detector circuit generates a
is undriven and driven. Analog digital pulse when a valid drop event is
multiplexor U4 normally grounds the detected. A drop event occurs when a
output of the sense capacitor C18/23 so fluid drop passes between the emitter
that room ambient light signal voltage is and detector of the Model 180 Flow
set across it. When the LED drive is Sensor and appears as a generally
turned on, the output of the sense negative going short duration pulse on
capacitor, representing the driven signal the DROP_A/B signal. Detector
voltage less the ambient signal voltage, comparators U8B/U7B generate a 0 to
is transferred to sample capacitor 5V pulse when a drop "signature" of
C28/C26. This signal is amplified by appropriate length and duration occurs.
U8/U7 with a gain of about 23 and is the One shots U9A/B generate a nominal
DROP_A/B signal. 20ms pulse which indicates a valid drop
(ECD-SIG-A/ECD-SIG-B). The main
The DROP_A/B signal is sensed by
system processor processes the pulse
integrator U1/U6 and C9/C10 to generate
stream and determines whether the
an appropriate LED drive level to
drops are occurring properly for the
maintain DROP_A/B at about 2.8V. The
current instrument rate and operating
integrator output signal is controlled by
mode (for example, primary/secondary).
drive enable FET Q1/Q2 to drive the LED
constant current sink U1/Q4 and relate EMC filtering is provided by filters C4-8 to
components. The constant current limit EMI into or out of the flow sensor
source generates a 0-200mA sink current connection pins.
with a 0V-1V input signal.

Figure 4-17. Flow Sensor Interface Block Diagram

Drop_A/B 2.8 V

+5 V

Model 180 Flow Sensor

U1/U6 U1/Q4 U7B/U8B

U7/ U9A/B
Sense U4 Sample
Constant U8 ECD_SIG_A/B One
V Capacitor Capacitor
A Drop
Integrator Current Detector Shot
Sink <18/23 <28/26
+5 V
Combo IC
V ECD_INSTALLED

Timing ECD A ACTIVE

CLK 32K Hz C
Logic

4-26 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

4.13 ECD BOARD (Continued)

• Option Installed and Sensor Installed
Circuit:
The installed option detection consists of
the input signal on pin 7 of J3 tied to +5V
on the board. The Main Processor has a
pulldown resistor on the
ECD_INSTALLED signal which
generates a logic low signal if the option
is not installed. Flow sensor installed
signals are generated by monitoring the
LED current sink drive transistor collector
voltage. Comparator U2A/U2B monitor
the voltage and generate a 5V output
signal if they drop below about 1.7V.
Note that, nominally, the collector voltage
should not go below about 2.2V with a
flow sensor attached and driven at
maximum current.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 4-27
Technical Service Manual
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

T H I S PA G E
I N T E N T I O N A L LY
LEFT BLANK

4-28 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
5 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
 Chapter 5 — CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.1 INTRODUCTION
WARNING
The instrument case should only be opened by This chapter contains procedures required
qualified personnel using proper grounding to properly disassemble, repair and replace
techniques. Disconnect instrument from AC parts as well as to test, calibrate, and
prior to performing maintenance. Hazardous reassemble a Signature Edition® GOLD
voltages are present when AC power is Infusion System.
connected, regardless of the ON/OFF Switch A thorough familiarization with the function
setting. and operation of the mechanical assemblies
and electrical circuits of the pump will enable
CAUTION repair and calibration to be accomplished
CMOS devices are sensitive to static electrical more efficiently (refer to “Principles of
charges and may be damaged during repair if Operation” chapter).
the repair activity is not performed in an The circuit boards used in the instrument
electrostatic discharge (ESD) protected are fitted with surface mount devices and
environment, using approved ESD protective are deemed nonfield repairable. Therefore,
procedures, including personnel grounding, or ALARIS Medical Systems requires that all
the instrument could be damaged. circuit boards be returned to an authorized
ALARIS Medical Systems Service Center
Table 5-1. Test Equipment
NAME MANUFACTURER MODEL NUMBER APPLICATION
Used to test AC wiring and pump
Electrical Safety Tester BIO-TEK 260*
grounding.
IV Infusion Set IVAC 80 VCS Rate accuracy test
Nurse Call Cable IVAC 136111 Nurse call option
Pressure Cal Set IVAC 70ISS Pressure verification and calibration
Dresser Industries: PTE1/901M1*
Pressure Gauge 203-406-3115
Pressure verification and calibration
(-400 to +750mmHg) (Heise) BIO-TEK:
802-655-4040 DPM III*
Burette 50mL, 0.1mL Fisher Scientific Class A or B*
Rate calibration and verification
increment Keynex 113 Sec A*
Connects between 2 instruments to
RS-232 (9-pin, Null modem) IVAC 133450*
download configuration.
Silicon Tubing IVAC 303109* Pressure calibration setup
T-Fitting IVAC 313815* Pressure calibration setup
Alexander Batteries Model 2006*
NiCad Battery Optomizer Test and condition batteries (optional)
800-577-2539 2003*
Hand-Held Vacuum Any Any Main board assembly cleaning
* or equivalent

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 5-1
Technical Service Manual
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.1 INTRODUCTION (Continued) Assembly Organization”, provides the

instrument’s hierarchy.
for repair. If circuit board repairs are
attempted, all warranties will be void. Though a dual channel instrument is
depicted in the following procedures, both
ALARIS Medical Systems recommends that
instruments disassemble in the same
parts within the instrument be replaced
manner. Channel B will be the same as a
rather than repaired when not working
single channel instrument.
properly. Boards, mechanism and display
modules must be replaced as an assembly.
WARNING
The tests to be performed on a just-repaired Disconnect instrument from AC power
instrument depend on the level of repairs before disassembling.
made to the instrument. See Table 5-2,
Level of Testing Guidelines. Disconnecting Cables
Pay close attention to cable routing when
NOTE: Due to instrument changes over disassembling the instrument. The cables
time, components/assemblies illustrated in are specifically routed to ensure they are not
this chapter may be different than those in
pinched or stressed when reassembled.
the instrument being disassembled. If there
Channel A (ChA) and Channel B (ChB)
are any questions, look for Service Bulletins
related to this chapter or contact ALARIS wires are routed in the opposite direction to
Medical Systems, Technical Support. connect to the board assembly.
NOTE: Single channel pump routing is
5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY similar to Channel B (ChB).
The following procedures are presented in a
sequence that provides the most efficient CAUTION
means of accessing and removing the Exercise caution when removing
subassemblies. To reassemble, perform the connectors. Pulling on wires can break
steps in their reverse order. Refer to the them. Wires and connectors must be
“Routing and Connecting Cables” section replaced as part of an assembly. They
before closing. Figure 5-1, “Instrument cannot be repaired separately.
Figure 5-1. Instrument Assembly Organization
Pole Clamp
Panel Lock Switch
Speaker
Rear Case Battery
Fan
ECD Board (optional) RS-232 Board AC Line Filter
Instrument AC Off Line Switcher

Lower LCD
Main Board LED
Main LCD
Front Case Mechanism (including AIL, LATCH and Pressure Sensor)
Main Keypad

5-2 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY a. New battery may have a different rated

(Continued) capacity (current battery has rated
capacity of 1.8 Ah, with 1.3 Ah entered
5.2.1 Removing Battery (Figures 5-2 and 5-3) in Diagnostics Mode).

NOTE: Instrument configuration will not be if it does, proceed to Diagnostics

lost when disconnecting power; however, Mode (D2), select Battery Status and
error history and infusion program settings enter new rated capacity. Refer to
may be lost. To save error history, record “Changing Rated Capacity of Battery”
before proceeding. section in “Troubleshooting” chapter.
1. Disconnect AC power from instrument. NOTE: In the event ALARIS Medical
2. Remove screw from Power Cord Systems provides different battery packs in
Retainer, on rear case, using a Phillips the future, the replacement battery may
screw driver. have a different rated capacity. The battery
manager needs to know if a new battery,
3. Remove Power Cord and Power Cord possibly with a new rated capacity, has
Retainer. been installed.

CAUTION b. Clear battery run time via Diagnostics

Mode after installing new battery.
When there is no AC power available, DO Refer to "Viewing Battery and Total
NOT replace dead battery for the purpose of Run Times" section in
re-powering the instrument. The instrument “Troubleshooting” chapter.
will not operate unless it is first connected to
AC power after battery replacement. NOTE: The instrument will attempt to
4. Lift and remove Battery Cover. refresh the battery when it is first
installed and connected to AC power.
5. Lift cable for battery out of compartment. This refresh may take in excess of 24
hours if the instrument is turned on.
6. Pull battery from compartment and
disconnect.

NOTE: The instrument will not run with

battery disconnected.
During Reassembly:
1. Connect and install battery. Note the
rated capacity of the battery.
2. Reassemble battery cover, power cable
and power cord retainer.
3. If battery has been replaced:

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 5-3
Technical Service Manual
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
(Continued)

5.2.1 Removing Batteries (Continued)

Figure 5-2. View From Back of Instrument

Power Cord Battery Cover

Power Cord Retainer

Battery Cover Screw

Figure 5-3. Alternate View From Back of Instrument

Battery

Battery Cover

5-4 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY a. Examine main board assembly for

(Continued) any signs of dust and clean, as
necessary, using a natural bristle
5.2.2 Separating Case Assemblies brush or hand-held vacuum.
(Figures 5-4 through 5-9b)
b. Using a natural bristle brush or hand-
1. Press on cutouts to pop off cap for held vacuum, remove dust from the
handle from inside (between handle and fan.
case) to access two screws to open
instrument. Remove 2 screws using a NOTE: Seal the vacuum contents in
Phillips screw driver (Figure 5-4). an appropriate bag and dispose
according to hospital protocol.
2. Remove hidden case screw inside
battery compartment (Figure 5-5). c. Perform a visual check of
mechanism springs (Refer to
3. Remove remaining case screws (6 for “Mechanism Visual Check” section”).
dual, 4 for single) (Figure 5-6).
During Reassembly:
4. Lay instrument face down. (Figures 5-9a and 5-9b)
5. Position pole clamp knob down (Figure 1. Refer to “Routing and Connecting
5-6). Cables” section.
6. Lift rear case to access inside of 2. Install and tighten case screws as
instrument. follows:
7. Disconnect power supply board a. Install and snug each screw,
connector/battery cable (Figure 5-7). beginning with #1 screw, until all
8. Lift up locking bar and remove RS-232 screws are snug and case halves are
flex cable from front case (Figures 5-7 flush.
and 5-8). b. Tighten each screw a 1/4 turn more
9. Disconnect ground wires (1 for single beginning with #1 screw installed.
channel) from under motor (Figure 5-7). c. Close latch when assembly is
10. Inspect and clean main board assembly, complete.
as follows, whenever instrument is d. If ECD feature is not being used,
opened and prior to performing install rubber plug in flow sensor
repair/maintenance procedures. receptacle.
NOTE: Dust may be brought into the
instrument through the cooling fan. If
instruments are consistently used in a
dusty environment, perform cleaning
yearly as part of the preventive
maintenance procedure.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 5-5
Technical Service Manual
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
(Continued)

5.2.2 Separating Case Assemblies

(Figures 5-4 through 5-9b)

Figure 5-4. Cap Handle Screws

(Remove Handle Cap to access

Case Screws from back)

Handle Cap
Snap Fit Points

Figure 5-5. Hidden Case Screw in Battery Compartment

Battery Compartment

Hidden Case Screw

5-6 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
(Continued)

5.2.2 Separating Case Assemblies (Continued)

Figure 5-6. Case Screw and Pole Clamp Position

Remaining RS 232

Case Screws

Pole Clamp Knob (Knob may appear like this)

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 5-7
Technical Service Manual
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
(Continued)

5.2.2 Separating Case Assemblies (Continued)

Figure 5-7. Separating Case Assemblies

Channel B Channel A

Locking Bar

Power Supply Board

Connector/Battery Cable

Ground Wire RS-232 Flex Cable

Ground Wire

Figure 5-8. Locking Bar

Locking Bars are used wherever flex
cables connect to Main PCB (7 places)

Locking Bars must be unlocked for

disassembly and locked for reassembly

Unlocked position
Flex cable
Locked position
PCB

5-8 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
(Continued)

5.2.2 Separating Case Assemblies (Continued)

Figure 5-9a. Torque Sequence (Single)

7 6

5 2
3

Case Screws (7) RS 232

Torque Sequence

1 Case Screw inside

Battery Compartment

4
1

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 5-9
Technical Service Manual
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
(Continued)

5.2.2 Separating Case Assemblies

(Continued)

Figure 5-9b. Torque Sequence (Dual)

8 7

6 9
1 4

Case Screws (9) RS 232

Torque Sequence

1 Case Screw
inside Battery
Compartment

3 5 2

5-10 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY NOTE: DO NOT remove cover from back

(Continued) of power supply board. If it is loose,
reinstall with RTV.
5.2.3 Removing Power Supply Board
Assembly (Figures 5-10a and 5-10b)
1. Remove 4 screws from Heat Sink using
Torx 3/32" (or 2.5mm) driver to separate
power supply board from inside of rear
case.
2. Disconnect cable from power supply
board.

Figure 5-10a. Removing Power Supply Board Assembly

Pole Clamp

RS 232

3/32” Screws (4)

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 5-11
Technical Service Manual
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
(Continued)

5.2.3 Removing Power Supply Board

Assembly (Continued)

Figure 5-10b. Disconnecting Cable

Power Supply Cable

Power Supply
Board Assembly
Cover

5-12 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY 3. Disconnect Panel Lock Key Pad flex

(Continued) cable by lifting up on locking bar.
4. Disconnect speaker and fan from RS-232
5.2.4 Removing ECD and RS-232 Board
Board.
Assemblies (Figures 5-11 through 5-13)
5. Remove screw on RS-232 board using
1. If installed, remove screw on ECD board
Phillips screw driver, then remove
using Phillips screw driver, then remove
RS-232 board.
ECD board.
2. Pull RS-232 cover away from connector
and remove 2 hex nuts using 3/16"
socket wrench .

Figure 5-11. Rear Case ECD Board

ECD Board

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 5-13
Technical Service Manual
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY (Continued)

5.2.4 Removing ECD and RS-232 Board

Assemblies (Continued)

Figure 5-12. RS-232 Cover

RS-232 Connector
(cover in place)

RS-232 Connector
(cover open)

3/16 inch Hex Nuts

and Lock Washers

5-14 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY (Continued)

5.2.4 Removing ECD and RS-232 Board

Assemblies (Continued)

Figure 5-13. RS-232 Board

Panel Lock Key Pad Flex Cable

Speaker Connector

RS-232 Board
Cable
Panel Lock Key Pad
Locking Bar Fan Connector

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 5-15
Technical Service Manual
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY 2. Remove two screws from exterior power

(Continued) connector using Phillips screw driver.
3. Cut zip tie.
5.2.5 Removing Line Filter (Figure 5-14)
4. Remove exterior power connector and
Line Filter assembly.
1. Remove screw from Line Filter using
Phillips screw driver.

Figure 5-14. Line Filter Assembly

Line Filter
(Behind RS-232 Board)

Line Filter Screws

(access from back)

5-16 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
(Continued)

5.2.6 Removing Speaker and Fan

(Figure 5-15)
1. Spread speaker tabs and remove
speaker.
2. Spread fan tabs and remove fan.

Figure 5-15. Speaker and Fan Assembly

Speaker Connector

Fan Connector

Speaker Tab Fan

Speaker Fan Tab (2 places)

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 5-17
Technical Service Manual
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY NOTE: Ensure compression spring seats

(Continued) properly in pole clamp channel.

5.2.7 Removing Pole Clamp 5. Apply lubricant (Dow Corning MolyKote

(Figures 5-16 and 5-17) 33 or Novagard Versilube G321) to
portion of pole clamp mounting pin that
1. Remove power supply board assembly. protrudes through spring release switch.
2. Remove hardware securing pole clamp 6. Insert pole clamp mounting pin through
to heat sink. opening in heat sink.
NOTE: If an older version of the pole 7. Install wave washer over end of pole
clamp was installed using a shoulder clamp mounting pin.
screw and wave washer, use a 3/16” allen
8. Install flat washer over end of pole clamp
wrench to remove shoulder screw.
Discard shoulder screw and wave washer. mounting pin, on top of wave washer.

3. Remove tip from end of pole clamp knob 9. Place retaining ring over end of pole
by pressing spiral pin out of opening in clamp mounting pin, on top of flat
end of brass thread. washer. Press downward on retaining
ring, compressing flat washer and wave
4. Unscrew knob from pole clamp. washer downward until retaining ring
snaps into groove on mounting pin.
During Reassembly: 10. Verify retaining ring is correctly installed.
Rotate retaining ring inside groove to
1. Screw knob into pole clamp assembly. ensure correct installation.
2. Attach pole clamp tip to end of thread on
knob and press spiral roll pin into
opening, through thread and tip.

NOTE: Press pin in so both ends of pin

are below bottom of threads on stud.
3. Reinstall compression spring into spring
release switch.
4. Install spring release switch onto pole
clamp assembly.

5-18 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
(Continued)

5.2.7 Removing Pole Clamp

(Continued)

Figure 5-16. Pole Clamp Assembly

Brass Knob
Stainless Steel Knob (old version)
(new version)

Spiral Pin

Compression Spring

Shown For
Reference Only Tip

Apply grease to
mounting pin Pole Clamp
Flat Washer

Spring Release Switch

(Pole Clamp Lock)

Wave
Washer
Retaining
Ring Heat Sink
(reference)

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 5-19
Technical Service Manual
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
(Continued)

5.2.7 Removing Pole Clamp

(Continued)

Figure 5-17. Retaining Ring Installation

Incorrectly Installed
Exposed Groove
Retaining Ring
Wide Gap

Top View
Mounting Pin

Correctly Installed

Narrow Gap

Top View

5-20 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY 4. Disconnect battery/power cable from

(Continued) main board.
5. Disconnect ground wires from
5.2.8 Disconnecting Cables
mechanism assembly. If needed,
(Figures 5-18a through 5-18c)
unhook ground wires from cable clamps
Rear Case (4 places on dual channel, 2 places on
1. Disconnect flex cable for RS-232 board single channel).
assembly. Lift up on locking bar before 6. Continue disassembly as required.
attempting to remove flex cable from
main board assembly.
2. Disconnect power supply cable from
power supply board.
3. Disconnect fan and speaker cable.

Figure 5-18a. Rear Case Cable Routing

Power Supply Cable

Clamp (Zip Tie)
Power Supply
Cable Tamper Switch
Cable

Cable Clamp
(Ground Lead)
Cable Clamp
(Ground Lead)

Battery/Power Cable Fan

RS-232 Flex Speaker
Connector

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 5-21
Technical Service Manual
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY 4. Cut tie #5 for ChA motor and AlL receiver
(Continued) (white).
5. Disconnect ChA and ChB transducer
5.2.8 Disconnecting Cables
wires (blue) from the board.
(Continued)
6. Disconnect ChA and ChB ground wires
Front Case
(black) going to the mechanism
1. Cut tie #l for ChB motor and AlL receiver assembly.
(black).
7. Disconnect flex cables for front panel,
2. Cut tie #2 for ChB motor, Latch, Rotation LED modules, main LCD, RS-232 board
and AlL receiver (black). assembly and lower LCD as needed. Lift
up on locking bar before attempting to
3. Cut tie #4 for ChA motor, Latch, Rotation
remove flex cable.
and AlL receiver (white).
8. Continue disassembly as required.

Figure 5-18b. Front Case Cable Routing

Channel B Channel A
LED Flex Cable
XDCR Cable

Back 4-Bar

Latch Cable
Motor Cable
Ground Wires
Tie #2
XDCR Cable

Rotation Cable

Motor Cable

Tie #1

AIL Receiver Cable

AIL Transmitter Cable

Lower LCD Power Supply Board

RS-232 Flex Cable
Flex Cable Connector/Battery Cable

5-22 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
(Continued)

5.2.8 Disconnecting Cables

(Continued)

Figure 5-18c. Front Case Cable Routing

Channel B Channel A

XDCR Cable

Latch Cable

Back 4-Bar

Motor Cable
Tie #4
Rotation Cable

Tie #5

AIL Transmitter Cable

Motor Cable

AIL Receiver Cable

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 5-23
Technical Service Manual
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY During Reassembly:

(Continued)
After installing the new main board, perform
5.2.9 Removing Main Board (Figure 5-19) the following:

1. Disconnect all wire connections to main 1. Check Rate Cal number in Diagnostic
board. Refer to “Disconnecting Cables” Mode.
section. D4 screen should have a Rate Cal # of
0% (refer to “Preventive Maintenance”
NOTES: chapter for “Rate Calibration Procedure”,
• When removing flex cables, carefully if needed, and “Troubleshooting” chapter
lift locking bar to remove cable from for procedure to change).
connector.
2. Perform Soft Pressure Calibration after
• Pay particular attention to wire routing. 30 minutes warm-up.
Wires should be routed back to initial
scheme and similar to the example
shown. This will prevent them from
getting pinched and jamming the
mechanism.
2. Remove screw from main board using
Phillips screw driver. Slide main board to
top, then lift and remove.

NOTE: The large capacitor for the backup

speaker may be discharged after removing
the board. Jumper across terminals of
capacitor C-146 (C-179) for one minute.
Refer to “Troubleshooting” chapter for
more information.

5-24 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
(Continued)

5.2.9 Removing Main Board (Continued)

Figure 5-19. Removing Main Board

Main Board Screw

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 5-25
Technical Service Manual
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
(Continued)

5.2.10 Removing LED and LCD Modules

(Figure 5-20)
1. Use fingers to compress and push back
snap fittings holding upper LEDs (only 1
on single channel), then lift and remove.
2. Use fingers to compress and push back
snap fittings holding main LCD module,
then lift and remove.
3. Use fingers to compress and push back
snap fittings holding lower LCD module,
then lift and remove.

Figure 5-20. LED / LCD Modules and Snap Fittings

Snap Fittings

LED Channel B

LED Channel A

Main LCD Module

Snap Fittings

Lower LCD Module

5-26 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY 2. Disconnect wiring harnesses from main

(Continued) board. Note their location. They will be
reconnected to same location.
5.2.11 Removing Mechanism
3. Using a flat head screwdriver, unsnap 3
(Figures 5-21 and 5-22)
snap fittings (top and both sides) holding
1. Move mechanism latch to middle mechanism to front case, then remove
position. This will allow air-in-line sensor mechanism.
to clear case when extracted.
4. Mark mechanism(s) latch housing "A" or
"B" with permanent ink to ensure
Figure 5-21. Mechanism Latch in Middle reinstallation in proper location on dual
Position channel pumps.
During Reassembly:
1. Install mechanism.
2. Perform pressure and rate calibration
(“Preventive Maintenance” chapter).

Latch (opened
half way)

Figure 5-22. Remove Mechanism

Channel B Channel A
Snap fittings

Mechanism

Snap fittings

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 5-27
Technical Service Manual
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
(Continued) 3. Slide on AlL gear and align AlL gear tab.
4. Press AlL gear into place.
5.2.12 Removing AIL Transmitter (Arm)
(Figures 5-23 through 5-25) NOTE: When AIL gear is pressed onto
AIL transmitter, AIL transmitter may shift
NOTE: Observe placement of cable ties (for slightly as gear locks into place.
reinstallation). Cut and remove them from
cables. 5. Use needle-nose pliers to lock gear tab
into place.
1. Use needle-nose pliers to unlock AlL
gear tab (Figure 5-23). 6. Turn mechanism latch to far left (closed
position) and check AlL transmitter
2. If replacing AlL receiver, replace before
alignment. AlL transmitter must be in
continuing with AlL transmitter
closed position (horizontal) (Figure 5-25).
removal/replacement.
7. If AlL transmitter is not properly aligned:
3. Remove AlL gear and AlL transmitter
unlock, realign and relock gear tab until
from mechanism.
transmitter is properly aligned.
4. Move mechanism latch to right (open
position). NOTE: AIL transmitter may need to be
aligned with inner edge of mechanism
During Reassembly: seal before locking gear into place.
1. Slide AlL transmitter through faceplate. 8. Move mechanism latch to middle
Rotate AlL transmitter to open (vertical) position. Install mechanism into front
position (Figure 5-24). case.
2. Thread AlL transmitter wire through AlL 9. Route and connect cables. Install cable
gear. tie straps on cables as before.

CAUTION
Grease is applied to a new AlL
transmitter for lubrication purposes. Do
not remove grease when installing a new
AlL transmitter into the mechanism. Do
not apply additional grease to the AlL
gear.

5-28 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
(Continued)

5.2.12 Removing AIL Transmitter (Arm)

(Continued)

Figure 5-23. Unlocking AIL Gear Tab Figure 5-24. AIL Transmitter in
Open Position
Tab
AIL
Transmitter

Inner Edge of
Slot Mechanism
Seal
AIL
Receiver
Figure 5-25. AIL Transmitter in
Closed Position

AIL
Transmitter

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 5-29
Technical Service Manual
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY NOTE: Mechanism seal may be lifted up

(Continued) to position AIL receiver accurately.

5.2.13 Removing AIL Receiver (Button) 3. Push AlL receiver in and rotate 90o
(Figures 5-26 and 5-27) counter-clockwise to lock into place.
4 Tuck mechanism seal under AlL receiver.
NOTE: Observe placement of cable ties (for
reinstallation). Cut and remove existing 5. Proceed with AlL transmitter
straps from cables. replacement, if needed, and continue
following steps for AlL receiver
1. Turn mechanism latch to far right. AlL
replacement.
transmitter will be in open position.
6. Close and open mechanism latch several
2. Push AlL receiver in and rotate about 90o
times to ensure AlL transmitter and
clockwise. AlL receiver should pop out.
receiver open and close properly.
3. Remove AlL receiver wire from
7. Route AlL receiver's wire under
faceplate's hook and remove receiver
faceplate's hook (Figure 5-27).
from mechanism.
8. With mechanism latch opened halfway,
NOTE: Leave AIL spring in place for new install mechanism into front case.
AIL receiver.
9. Route and connect cables. Install cable
tie straps onto cables.
During Reassembly:
1. Thread AlL receiver wire through
opening.
2. Install AlL receiver with flat edge of
assembly positioned as shown in Figure
5-26.

Figure 5-26. Flat Edge of AIL Receiver Figure 5-27. Faceplate Hook

Flat
Edge

Faceplate
Hook

Mechanism
Seal

5-30 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
(Continued)

5.2.14 Removing Seal Clip (Figure 5-28)

1. Put latch in middle position to remove
seal clip.
2. Use an orange stick to push 2 lower tabs
inward while pulling out on seal clip to
unsnap seal clip.
3. Remove seal clip.

During Reassembly:
Align seal clip and snap it in place.

Figure 5-28. Mechanism Latch in Middle

Position

Latch (opened
half way)

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 5-31
Technical Service Manual
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY During Reassembly: (Figure 5-29)

(Continued)
1. Apply mechanism seal on mechanism.
5.2.15 Removing Mechanism Seal
2. Use an orange stick to tuck seal in
1. Peel off mechanism seal from
around flow control actuator, clamp arms,
mechanism.
cam follower and AIL receiver.
2. Peel and clean off any RTV adhesive
3. Reinstall seal clip and AIL transmitter.
remaining around pressure sensor area.
4. Use RTV 3140 under edges of seal and
CAUTION secure in place.
To avoid damage, be careful not to apply 5. Remove any excess RTV with a cotton
excessive pressure on the pressure swab, Kimwipes or equivalent. Verify no
transducer. RTV is exposed to open area.
6. Allow RTV to dry and reinstall
mechanism.

Figure 5-29. Apply RTV Under Edges

of Seal
Apply RTV to
void areas

Apply RTV to under-

edges of seal

5-32 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
(Continued)
During Reassembly:
5.2.16 Removing Keypad Assembly
1. Fold back a small portion of protective
backing along right side of keypad.
CAUTION 2. Insert keypad flex cables into slot and
Remove the keypad only if it is defective. guide them through.
Removing a good keypad will ruin it.
3. Align right edge of keypad and affix.
Once aligned, position keypad and
1. Take a corner of keypad and peel it away remove remaining protective backing.
from front case. 4. Press around perimeter of keypad to
2. Remove any remaining residue from assure adhesion to front case and
surface before applying new keypad. prevention of fluid ingress.
5. Remove any protective covering from
front of keypad.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 5-33
Technical Service Manual
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY 9. Route CH B AIL receiver cable (black) up

(Continued) over motor assembly and connect to
main board. Install tie #1 to motor cable
5.2.17 Routing and Connecting Cables and CH B AIL receiver cable (black).
(Figures 5-30a through 5-31)
10. Route CH B rotation sensor cable out to
NOTE: Cable routing may change over time right side and under back 4-bar
to ensure wires are not pinched and ease of (mechanism). Connect to main board.
assembly and disassembly is maintained. If 11. Route CH B latch sensor to right under
the cable routing is different when the
back 4-bar. Connect to main board.
instrument is opened, follow that cable
routing scheme. 12. Install tie #2 around CH B motor, latch,
Front Case rotation and AIL receiver cable (black)
wires.
1. Ensure main board and mechanism are
installed. Route ground wires through 13. Ensure locking bars are up on flex cable
cable clamps, if present, and connect to connectors. Install flex cables for front
transducer. panel, LED modules, main LCD, RS-232
board assembly and lower LCD as
2. Route transducer cable (blue) under needed to main board.
motor assembly out left side for CH A
(dual) and out right side for CH B 14. Install battery/power cable to main board.
(single). Bend wire up and lay along
mechanism frame. Connect to main WARNING
board. Always perform a Rate Accuracy
Verification after mechanism and board
3. Route channel A AIL transmitter wire
have been removed and reinstalled, or
(white) up over motor and install tie wrap
cables have been disconnected and
#5 with motor wires for CH A. Connect to
reconnected.
main board.
4. Route CH A AIL receiver cable (black) out Rear Case
to left side of mechanism. Route CH B
1. If needed, re-hook ground wires to cable
AIL transmitter cable (white) to right of
clamps (4 places on dual channel, 2
mechanism. Connect both to main board.
places on single channel). Reconnect
5. Route CH A rotation sensor cable out to ground wires from mechanism assembly.
right side and over back 4-bar
2. Reconnect battery/power cable to main
(mechanism). Connect to main board.
board.
6. Route CH A latch sensor to left under
3. Reconnect fan and speaker cable.
back 4-bar. Connect to main board.
4. Reconnect power supply cable to power
7. Connect CH A motor assembly cable to
supply board.
main board.
5. Reconnect flex cable for RS-232 board
8. Install tie #4 around CH A motor, latch,
assembly and resecure locking bar.
rotation and AIL transmitter (white) wires.

5-34 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
(Continued)

5.2.17 Routing and Connecting Cables

(Continued)

Figure 5-30a. Front Case Cable Routing

Channel B Channel A
LED Flex Cable
XDCR Cable

Back 4-Bar

Latch Cable
Motor Cable
Ground Wires
Tie #2
XDCR Cable

Rotation Cable

Motor Cable

Tie #1

AIL Receiver Cable

AIL Transmitter Cable

Lower LCD Power Supply Board

RS-232 Flex Cable
Flex Cable Connector/Battery Cable

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 5-35
Technical Service Manual
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
(Continued)

5.2.17 Routing and Connecting Cables

(Continued)

Figure 5-30b. Front Case Cable Routing

Channel B Channel A

XDCR Cable
Latch Cable

Back 4-Bar

Motor Cable
Tie #4
Rotation Cable

Tie #5

AIL Transmitter Cable

Motor Cable

AIL Receiver Cable

5-36 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
(Continued)

5.2.17 Routing and Connecting Cables

(Continued)

Figure 5-31. Rear Case Cable Routing

Power Supply Cable

Power Supply Clamp (Zip Tie)
Cable

Tamper Switch
Cable

Cable Clamp
(Ground Lead)

Cable Clamp
(Ground Lead)

Speaker Fan
Battery/Power Cable RS-232 Flex
Connector

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 5-37
Technical Service Manual
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.3 TEST AND CALIBRATION 5.3.2 Mechanism Visual Check

(Figures 32 through 35)

NOTE: Calibration coefficients for the

transducer are stored in the EPROM on the Parts and Tools Required:
main board assembly. Once they have been • Pen light, or equivalent inspection light
calibrated, the mechanism and board
assemblies become a matched set. • Spring Installation Tool; ALARIS
Replacement of either requires pressure and P/N 144107
rate calibration.
or

Additional testing and calibration may be Spring Installation Tool Kit; ALARIS
required after certain repairs are completed. P/N 145098 (includes tool and
These tests are in addition to the Preventive instructions for use)
Maintenance tests. See Table 5-2, "Level of Perform a visual check of the mechanism
Testing Guidelines", for more information. prior to installing it into the front case. Each
time the instrument is opened, verify the
5.3.1 Power-On Self Test mechanism springs are properly positioned.
The power-on self test deals with 1. Verify all 12 followers are in place and
determining the proper operating condition that mechanism is flush to front case.
of the fully assembled instrument. The
instrument contains extensive self-testing 2. Rotate latch handle and check for full,
software. The self test is a final test. uninterrupted range of motion.
3. Verify seal is correctly in place.
The self test is initiated each time the
instrument is turned on. The instrument
continually tests itself during operation, as WARNINGS
well. An alarm or error message will appear
• Do not attempt to reinstall springs or
if there is a problem.
repair a mechanism assembly by any
When turning on the instrument, verify that means not specified in the following
the instrument beeps and that all display procedure. Springs can be damaged if
segments and LEDs flash. This confirms improperly installed, which can reduce
that the instrument has performed its self rate accuracy or lead to an "uncontrolled
tests and is operating correctly. flow" condition.
• Repair of a mechanism assembly
requires fixturing not available for field
use. Replace (do not repair) a
mechanism assembly that is found to
have an improperly installed spring after
completing the following procedure.

5-38 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.3 TEST AND CALIBRATION (Continued) b. If visual inspection of spring in step 4c

found it to be properly positioned, and
5.3.2 Mechanism Visual Check (Continued) there is no spring movement when
4. Use an inspection light to visually inspect pressing installation tool in place,
each of the 4 spring attachment points on spring connection is acceptable and
mechanism assembly (both mechanisms inspection is complete.
if a dual channel). c. If visual inspection of spring in step 4c
a. Verify each spring is properly installed found it to NOT be properly
onto each clamp arm. If each spring positioned, and spring snaps into
is properly installed, continue with place with firm pressure, spring
next step; otherwise, proceed to connection is now acceptable and
step 6 to replace mechanism inspection is complete.
assembly. d. If visual inspection of spring in step 4c
b. Verify spring is properly installed onto found it to NOT be properly
motor plate (brown colored part). If positioned, and it does NOT snap into
spring is properly installed, continue place with firm pressure, spring
with next step; otherwise, proceed to connection is NOT acceptable.
step 6 to replace mechanism Continue with step 6, for replacement
assembly. and return of mechanism assembly.

c. Verify whether or not spring is properly 6. If, after inspecting mechanism spring
installed onto back guide (white connections per steps 4 and 5, it has
colored part with a metal insert at been determined that mechanism needs
spring attachment). Continue with replacement:
next step. a. Replace mechanism assembly.
5. Use spring installation tool to ensure b. Return mechanism to ALARIS Medical
proper installation of spring to back guide Systems (refer to “General Contact
attachment point. Information” at beginning of this
a. Firmly press groove of installation tool manual).
over rib just below spring connection
point on back guide.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 5-39
Technical Service Manual
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.3 TEST AND CALIBRATION (Continued)

5.3.2 Mechanism Visual Check (Continued)

Figure 5-32. Mechanism Assembly

Spring Location: Between motor plate
and clamp arm (Partial sketched view of
mechanism, for spring location reference only.) Figure 5-33. Mechanism Assembly
Spring Location: Between back guide
Back 4-Bar and clamp arm (Partial sketched view of
Spring connection to motor plate
mechanism, for spring location reference only.)
Back 4-Bar Spring connection to back guide

Spring connection to clamp arm

(see exploded views below)
Spring connection to clamp arm
(see exploded views below)

Correct installation Incorrect installation

Exploded Views
(spring connection to clamp arm) Correct installation Incorrect installation
Exploded Views
(spring connection to clamp arm)

5-40 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.3 TEST AND CALIBRATION (Continued)

5.3.2 Mechanism Visual Check (Continued)

Figure 5-34. Detail of Proper

Mechanism Spring Position

Figure 5-35. Spring Installation Tool

Position (Partial view of mechanism assembly,
Correct spring for spring location reference only.)
Incorrect position
spring position
Spring Installation Tool
(keep tool square to
Spring connection to Clamp Arms and Motor Plate mechanism)

Incorrect Part of back guide

spring (white with metal
Correct spring
position insert)
position

Use firm
pressure
to seat
spring
Spring connection to Back Guide

CAUTION
The spring installation tool is for use only at
the spring attachment to the back guide.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 5-41
Technical Service Manual
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.3 TEST AND CALIBRATION (Continued) 5. Apply pressure of 15 + 1 psi (775 + 50

mmHg) for 1 minute.
5.3.3 Mechanical Leak Test (Figure 5-36)
6. Verify air bubbles do not continue to
1. Use a variable pressure air source show up in fluid container.
(squeeze ball or equivalent), reservoir,
and pressure gauge. Install non-check NOTE: When air pressure is first applied,
valve set (72013) into instrument. a few bubbles are acceptable during
mechanical leak test.
NOTE: No fluid in set for mechanical leak
7. If bubbles continue to show in fluid
test.
container, return instrument to factory or
2. Cut off drip chamber of set, if needed, to replace mechanism or case, as needed.
place into a fluid container filled with
water.
3. Install set in instrument and close latch.
4. Connect variable pressure air source,
reservoir, and pressure meter to set at
bottom of instrument.

Figure 5-36. Leak Test Setup

Air Pressure Source

15 psi (775 mmHg)

0 775
PSI
mmHg

Instrument
Stand Pressure
Gauge

Reservoir

5-42 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.3 TEST AND CALIBRATION (Continued) 5.3.5 Set Sensor Check

1. Enter Diagnostic Mode and advance to
5.3.4 Pressure Verification and Calibration
D6 page.
Test
2. Install set and allow a 30-minute warm-
up while in Diagnostic Mode.
Refer to “Pressure Calibration” section in
“Preventive Maintenance” Chapter for soft 3. Sensor reading with set in should be
cal procedure. greater than 170 mmHg
4. Remove set and close latch. Sensor
reading with set out should be -80 to
+30 mmHg. If not, perform soft pressure
calibration detailed in “Troubleshooting”
chapter.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 5-43
Technical Service Manual
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.3 TEST AND CALIBRATION (Continued) 3. Move AccuSlide® Flow Regulator clamp
up to open position.
5.3.6 Test Run Mode (Figure 5-37)
4. Fill lower portion of tubing with RTV. Do
The test run mode enables the instrument to not let RTV enter dome area.
run without fluid after being repaired. To run
5. Allow to dry (48 hours). Move
the instrument without fluid, perform the
AccuSlide® Flow Regulator clamp down
following:
until it "clicks" into closed position, and
1. Cut AccuSlide® Flow Regulator segment install test set into instrument.
out of standard set. Leave 2 inches of
6. Select rate and run for desired time
tubing at top and bottom.
period, for example 100 mL/h for 15
2. Cut membrane on backside of minutes.
AccuSlide® Flow Regulator clamp at
7. Remove test set.
bottom of pumping segment. Use knife
or other appropriate tool and cut an 'X'
into membrane to relieve pressure that
will build up during testing.

Figure 5-37. Run-In Set

2” Segment

AccuSlide® Flow
Regulator
clamp (open)

AccuSlide® Flow
Place “X” cut here Regulator clamp
(on backside) (closed)

Dome (on
backside)

2” Segment
of RTV

5-44 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.3 TEST AND CALIBRATION (Continued) 6. Evaluate sensor in D6 Pressure

Calibration page (see “Troubleshooting”
5.3.7 Hard Pressure Cal Procedure chapter), as follows:

NOTE: When performing the Hard Pressure a. Press lower left soft key 4 times to see
Calibration, take care not to press downward Count = value.
on the transducer. The pot is a one-turn, b. If Count = value is between 875 and
surface-mount pot with a rivet in the middle.
1275, go to start of Pressure Cal
Use a small screwdriver or scribe to push
sideways on the two slots in the pot. If the
screen. Verify Sensor = reading is
Count = value is 0 or 4095, this could between -80 and +30 mmHg after set
indicate a bad transducer and necessitate is removed (repeat for other channel if
replacement of the mechanism. necessary). If not, perform soft
pressure calibration.
1. Ensure warm-up of 1 hour minimum.
c. If Count = value is less than 875 or
2. Leave instrument on and connected to
more than 1275, perform hard cal for
AC power and battery.
this channel.
3. Follow procedure to disassemble
7. Adjust transducer pot for a Count = value
instrument.
of 1175±25 counts.
NOTE: There is one case screw inside the 8. Once transducer is adjusted for proper
battery compartment. reading, press ok to accept value.
4. Do not disconnect any cables. Adjust 9. Close instrument by setting bottom of
pole clamp so knob is facing downward. front case onto rear case, using case
Lay front case on desk/bench top. bosses for alignment. For a dual channel
5. Locate pot under motor and on backside instrument, route long ground wire into
of transducer (Figure 5-38). corner of case boss. Ensure ground
wires do not rub against mechanism.
Figure 5-38. Transducer Pot
10. Check for proper routing of cables.
11. Close case by following pattern and
tightening procedure outlined earlier in
this chapter.
12. Wait 30 minutes for transducer to warm
up again and check that compensated
value is still in range, as noted earlier.
13. Perform soft pressure cal procedure
(after 30-minute warm-up) as follows:
Motor a. Install 70ISS Press Cal Set.
Transducer
POT

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 5-45
Technical Service Manual
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.3 TEST AND CALIBRATION (Continued)

5.3.7 Hard Pressure Cal Procedure

(Continued)

b. Advance to D6 page in diagnostics

mode. Select Cal Pressure for
desired channel.
c. Press soft key next to 0 mmHg. Verify
display reads Pass to right of 0 mmHg
value and Fail for 500 mmHg, and
Complete Press Cal now replaces
Sensor = reading.
d. Attach pressure meter and squeeze
ball to end of pressure cal set. Apply
500±2 mmHg.
e. Press soft key next to 500 mmHg.
Verify both 0 and 500 values now say
pass.
f. Press ok to accept. Soft Cal is now
complete.

5.3.8 Checking Pressure Calibration Set

1. Go to Diagnostics Mode, D6 page, to

access Pressure Calibration section.
2. Note sensor reading.
3. Install pressure calibration set.
4. If sensor reading has had a greater than
+20 count shift, or pressure calibration
leaks, replace set.
5.

5-46 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.4 LEVEL OF TESTING GUIDELINES

Table 5.2. Level of Testing Guidelines

This table provides minimum test requirements. If instrument operation is at all doubtful, perform
a complete Preventive Maintenance Inspection.

NOTE: The number in parentheses is the chapter that describes the test/action.
Tests to Perform →

Pressure Calibration (hard) (5)

Set PM Interval, Auto Zero (6)

Rate Accuracy Verification (3)

Pressure Calibration (soft) (3)

Ground Current Leakage and
• = Required

Configuration Procedure (2)

Leak Test (mechanical) (5)

Test Channel Sensors (6)

Mechanism Visual Check

Mechanism Visual Check

X = Recommended

Set Time, Date, ID# (6)

Clear Battery Time (6)
A/R = As Required

(part of Pressure Cal)

Set Sensor Check (5)

Perform Rate Cal (3)

Resistance Tests (3)
N/A = Not Applicable
Functional Test (3)

Test Run Mode (5)

Flow Stop Test (3)

Blank = Optional Main LCD Test (6)

(complete) (5)

(springs) (5)
Repair/Replacement of ↓

Battery •
Case • • • • • X • • X • X
Keyboard Assy. • • • X •
LCD Module, Lower • • • • X •
LCD Module, Main • • • • X •
LED Module • • • • X •
Main Board • • • X • • • A/R • • • • X
Mechanism • • • • • • • A/R • • • X
Panel Lock Keypad • • • X •
Power Switcher X • • • •
Software • • • X • • • A/R • • • • X
Speaker • • • •
Other repairs • X • • • • A/R X • X
Miscellaneous: ↓↓
Miscellaneous:
Instrument Dropped • • • • • • • • • X
New Instrument Checkout • • • • • • • X X X
Rate Accuracy failure
after Rate Cal.
N/A • •
No Fault Found
(instrument opened) • X • • • • X • X

No Fault Found
(instrument not opened) • • • X

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 5-47
Technical Service Manual
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

T H I S PA G E
I N T E N T I O N A L LY
LEFT BLANK

5-48 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
6 TROUBLESHOOTING
 Chapter 6 — TROUBLESHOOTING

6.1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains descriptions of
WARNING possible operating errors and technical
Use extreme caution in servicing the problems that may be encountered during
instrument when connected to AC power. use of the instrument. Refer to this chapter
Hazardous voltages are present when AC before attempting to service the Signature
power is connected, regardless of the setting Edition® GOLD Infusion System.
of the power switch.
To facilitate troubleshooting, the instrument
will alarm and display prompts that direct
attention to the problem. Alarms that relate
CAUTION to operating problems are listed in the
Before disconnecting the battery, applicable Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion
disassembling, troubleshooting or testing the System Directions for Use (DFU).
instrument, record the alarm history. Refer to
“Viewing Alarm or Event History (Event Log)”
section of this chapter.

Table 6-1. Technical Troubleshooting Guide

This table contains information for troubleshooting possible technical problems. The steps in the
“Remedy” column are listed in the sequence in which the specified actions are to be taken.
Before making a final diagnosis, visually inspect the instrument for damage. Pay particular attention
to the power cord and plug. Verify the instrument is electrically safe by performing the Ground Current
Leakage and Ground Resistance tests (refer to the applicable Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion
System DFU).

PROBLEM REMEDY
Accuracy Verification 1. Try new 80VCS Rate Cal set and repeat test a second time.
Fails 2. Check for mechanical damage and proper loading of administration
sets.
3. Perform Rate Calibration.
4. Replace mechanism.
5. Return to factory.
Air-in-Line 1. Air in set. Remove air or press RESET to move air through line.
2. Change AIL setting.
3. Clean AIL transducer/receiver.
4. Check connector.
5. Replace AIL transmitter.
6. Replace AIL receiver.
7. Return to factory.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 6-1
Technical Service Manual
TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 6-1. Technical Troubleshooting Guide (Continued)

PROBLEM REMEDY

Backup Speaker Activated 1. Discharge capacitor C146 (C179) by placing jumper across capacitor
while handling main PCB terminals.
Batt Refresh A charge/discharge/recharge cycle was initiated. This can occur:
1. When battery is disconnected and reconnected to AC power.
2. By entering 0.0Ah in rated capacity, connecting to AC, then change rated
capacity back to 1.3Ah.

Battery Low 1. Plug into AC power.

Battery Failed 2. Recondition battery with 2 or 3 charge/discharge cycles.
3. Replace battery.
4. Replace main PCB.
5. Return to factory.
Downstream Occlusion 1. Check setup and tubing (kinked, clogged filter, etc.).
2. Check pressure calibration.
Display Problem 1. Check cable connections.
2. Replace LCD/LED module.
3. Replace main PCB.
4. Return to factory.
FAN is noisy 1. Check cable routing and snap fits.
2. Replace fan.
3. Replace main PCB.
4. Return to factory.
Hold/Setup Time Exceeded 1. Press Run/Hold to resume operation.
2. Turn off instrument if not in use.
Intermittent Operation 1. Check cable connections to main PCB.
2. Replace main PCB.
3. Return to factory.
Instrument/Channel 1. Turn instrument/channel off and back on to see if problem clears.
Malfunction 2. Refer to alarm history for fault detected and Table 6-2: Error Messages.
Key Stuck Alarm 1. Turn instrument off and back on to see if problem clears.
2. Replace channel A LCD module.
3. Replace keypad assembly.
4. Replace main PCB.
5. Return to factory.
Latch Open Alarm 1. Check for proper set installation.
2. Verify latch closed and moves easily back and forth.
3. Verify sensor not loose.
4. Verify connector not loose.
5. Replace mechanism.
6. Return to factory.

6-2 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 6-1. Technical Troubleshooting Guide (Continued)

PROBLEM REMEDY
LCD Contrast is Dark or Light 1. Change contrast setting to 80, tilt unit to help view or follow information in
Diagnostics Mode.
2. Replace main LCD.
3. Replace main PCB.
4. Return to factory.
Mechanical Leak Test Fails 1. Check mechanism for damage and proper mounting into snap fittings.
2. Replace mechanism.
3. Return to factory.
No Power 1. Wait 15 seconds after connecting to AC power.
2. Check/replace battery.
3. Replace power supply board (AC off line switcher).
4. Replace keypad.
5. Replace main PCB.
6. Return to factory.
Press Restart In alarm history, this indicates infusion reached occlusion alarm point in
pressure or resistance modes, but cleared within 40 seconds.
Pressure Calibration (Soft) 1. Check setup and warmup time of at least 30 minutes.
Fails 2. Retry with new 70ISS set.
3. Perform pressure calibration (hard).
4. Replace mechanism.
5. Replace main PCB.
6. Return to factory.
Pressure Verification Fails 1. Check for damage and proper loading of 70ISS set.
2. Perform pressure calibration (soft).
3. Perform pressure calibration (hard).
4. Replace mechanism.
5. Return to factory.
Program Lost Normal condition if battery disconnected or in a low state of charge.
Reprogram settings and continue operation.
Resis Restart In alarm history, this indicates infusion reached 100% resistance or alarm point,
but cleared within 40 seconds.
Self Check Due 1. Install set, wait one minute and remove set.
2. Check latch sensor for proper operation.
3. Check pressure calibration (soft).
4. Perform Hard Pressure Cal.
5. Replace mechanism.
6. Return to factory.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 6-3
Technical Service Manual
TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 6-1. Technical Troubleshooting Guide (Continued)

PROBLEM REMEDY
Set Out Alarms 1. Try another set.
2. Lower instrument closer to patient level.
3. Perform pressure calibration (soft).
4. Perform pressure calibration (hard).
5. Replace mechanism.
6. Return to factory.
Set Sensor Check Fails 1. Try a second set.
2. Perform pressure verification.
SW APPL Software error. Turn instrument off and back on. If problem reoccurs, return
instrument to factory or replace main PCB.
SW Shutdown Battery voltage reached 10.2 volts, or five minutes elapsed since low battery
alarm, and battery manager told CPU to turn off instrument.
Charge or replace battery as needed.

Switches Inoperative 1. Replace (Channel A) LED Module.

2. Replace keypad.
3. Replace main PCB.
4. Return to factory.
Upstream Occlusion Alarm 1. Try another set.
2. Raise container higher to patient.
3. Check for downstream occlusion.
4. Check pressure cal (soft).
5. Could be high resistance in catheter, positional IV, etc.
USO Restart In alarm history, this indicates a resistance condition exists making it difficult to
distinguish between upstream and downstream occlusion, but cleared in a few
seconds.

6-4 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 6-2. Error Messages

The following hardware error messages can be generated by the instrument. These display
messages indicate that the instrument has detected an internal malfunction. Use tables 6-2 and 6-3
to diagnose and correct technical problems. Steps in the “Remedy” column are listed in the sequence
in which the specified actions are to be taken.

MESSAGE PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY

AIL DETECTOR Air-in-Line detector failed. Broken wire or 1. Clean AIL.
loose connection. 2. Test in diagnostic mode.
3. Replace AIL transmitter or receiver.
4. Return to factory.
BATTERY OPEN Battery Manager reported battery open. 1. Check connector/replace battery cable.
2. Replace battery.
3. Replace main PCB.
4. Return to factory.
BATTERY SHORT Battery Manager reported battery shorted. 1. Check connector.
2. Replace battery.
3. Replace main PCB.
4. Return to factory.
BK SPKR CONECT Backup speaker power didn’t connect 1. Replace main PCB.
(start-up). 2. Return to factory.
BK SPKR DISCON Backup speaker power didn’t disconnect 1. Replace main PCB.
(start-up). 2. Return to factory.
BKUP SPKR ERR Backup speaker didn’t operate (start-up 1. Replace main PCB.
and run). 2. Return to factory.
CLOCK SYNC ERR Main CPU and watchdog clocks do not 1. Replace main PCB.
agree. 2. Return to factory.
CPU TEST FAIL CPU test failed (start-up and run). 1. Replace main PCB.
2. Return to factory.
DATASET CRC Error occurred when software and data set 1. Try to reload data set. If this does not
CRC do not match. Error text message in work, data set will need to be recreated.
event log should read “DATASET CRC”.
ECD UNINSTALLED Fault in Flow Sensor interface. 1. Check ECD Board and connections.
2. Replace main PCB.
3. Return to factory.
EEPROM BAD CRC Unrecoverable EEPROM CRC error. 1. Reconfigure and recalibrate.
2. Replace main PCB.
3. Return to factory.
EPROM CRC CRC generator output did not equal CRC 1. Reflash embedded software.
value in ROM. 2. Replace main PCB.
3. Return to factory.
HW CRC GEN CRC generator did not return zero after 1. Replace main PCB.
last byte. 2. Return to factory.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 6-5
Technical Service Manual
TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 6-2. Error Messages (Continued)

MESSAGE PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY

HW MALFUNCTION Battery Manager reported hardware 1. Replace main PCB.
malfunction. 2. Return to factory.
ILLEGAL RESET Processor reset while running. 1. Replace main PCB.
2. Return to factory.
LATCH ERR Latch sensor failed. 1. Check placement and
connections.
2. Replace mechanism.
3. Return to factory.
LCD RAM ERROR LCD controller memory didn’t match image in 1. Replace LCD module.
main RAM. 2. Replace main PCB.
3. Return to factory.
LCD TURNED OFF LCD Controller is off. 1. Replace LCD module.
2. Replace main PCB.
3. Return to factory.
LED CH TEST LED error (start-up). 1. Replace LED module.
2. Replace main PCB.
3. Return to factory.
LED SEG CHAN LED stuck row detect failure (start-up). Stuck 1. Replace LED module.
row (start-up or run). Segment failure (start-up 2. Replace main PCB.
or run). 3. Return to factory.
LED SEG INST LED stuck row detect failure (start-up). Stuck 1. Replace LED module.
row (start-up or run). Segment failure (start-up 2. Replace main PCB.
or run). 3. Return to factory.
MOTOR BEHIND Motor didn’t step correct number of steps. 1. Check optics.
2. Replace mechanism.
3. Replace main PCB.
4. Return to factory.
MOTOR MID Motor too slow for fast bi-rate or too fast for 1. Check optics.
slow bi-rate. 2. Replace mechanism.
3. Replace main PCB.
4. Return to factory.
MOTOR SYNC Motor didn’t step correct number of steps. 1. Check optics and connections.
2. Check motor screws not loose.
3. Replace mechanism.
4. Replace main PCB.
5. Return to factory.
MOTOR TOO FAST Motor running too fast. 1. Check optics.
2. Replace mechanism.
3. Replace main PCB.
4. Return to factory.

6-6 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 6-2. Error Messages (Continued)

MESSAGE PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY

MOTOR TOO SLOW Motor running too slow or not running. 1. Check optics.
2. Replace mechanism.
3. Replace main PCB.
4. Return to factory.
MTR CURR SENSE Motor current sense failed. 1. Replace mechanism.
2. Replace main PCB.
3. Return to factory.
PM BAD COMMAND Battery manager or SCU error. 1. Replace main PCB.
2. Return to factory.
PM BAD CRC Battery manager or SCU error. 1. Replace main PCB.
2. Return to factory.
PM ERROR Battery manager error (start-up or 1. Replace main PCB.
shutdown). 2. Return to factory.
PRESSURE CAL REQ Pressure Calibration required. 1. Perform pressure cal (soft).
2. Perform pressure cal (hard).
3. Replace mechanism.
4. Replace main PCB.
5. Return to factory.
PRESSURE ERR Pressure sensor test failed. 1. Try another set.
2. Check for downstream occlusion.
3. Perform pressure cal (soft).
4. Perform pressure cal (hard).
5. Replace mechanism if TC=0 or 4095 (±5).
6. Return to factory.
PRI SPEAKER ERR Primary audio failed. 1. Replace speaker and check connections.
2. Check flex cable to main PCB connected.
3. Replace main PCB.
4. Return to factory.
RAM ADDR BUS Address bus test failed (start and run). 1. Replace main PCB.
2. Return to factory.
RAM CLEARED Recoverable RAM error. All data lost. 1. Turn power off and back on, should get
Normal occurrence for manually “program lost” message, continue
initiated refresh cycle. operation.
2. Replace main PCB.
3. Replace LED module.
4. Return to factory.
RAM COMPARATOR RAM comparator failed to detect a 1. Turn power OFF/ON to reset.
forced phantom RAM error (start-up 2. Replace main PCB.
and run). 3. Return to factory.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 6-7
Technical Service Manual
TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 6-2. Error Messages (Continued)

MESSAGE PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY

RAM DATA BUS RAM data test (dedicated byte) failed (start- 1. Replace main PCB.
up and run). 2. Return to factory.
RAM DMA WRITE DMA write to RAM detected (start-up and 1. Replace main PCB.
run). 2. Return to factory.
RAM PHANTOM RD Phantom RAM didn’t compare equal (start-up 1. Replace main PCB.
and run). 2. Return to factory.
RAM TEST WHOLE Unrecoverable phantom RAM compare error 1. Replace main PCB.
at start-up. 2. Return to factory.
RATE CAL REQ. Channel requires rate calibration. 1. Perform/Check rate cal (0%).
2. Replace mechanism.
3. Replace main PCB.
4. Return to factory.
SCU ERROR Serial control unit error (start-up and shut- 1. Replace main PCB.
down). 2. Return to factory.
SENSOR RNG ERR Pressure sensor failed during calibration. 1. Replace main PCB.
2. Return to factory.
SPURIOUS INT Spurious interrupt or bad jump. 1. Replace main PCB.
2. Return to factory.
STUCK POWER KEY Power key stuck or held down too long (over 1. Replace keyboard and front panel
6 seconds). assy.
2. Replace main PCB.
3. Return to factory.
S/W SHUTDOWN Battery voltage less than 10.2V. 1. Connect to AC power.
2. Replace battery.
3. Replace main PCB.
4. Return to factory.
Vbackup HIGH VBKUP HIGH over 6.5V. 1. Replace main PCB.
2. Return to factory.
Vbackup LOW VBKUP LOW less then 4.85V. 1. Replace main PCB.
2. Return to factory.
VBRIDGE ERROR Bridge voltage on pressure sensor incorrect. 1. Let instrument warm up for 1 hour.
2. Check for downstream occlusion.
3. Try another set.
4. Perform pressure cal (soft).
5. Perform pressure cal (hard).
6. Replace mechanism.
7. Return to factory.

6-8 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 6-2. Error Messages (Continued)

MESSAGE PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY

Vcc HIGH Vcc high. Over 5.469 Volts. 1. Replace main PCB.
2. Return to factory.
Vcc LOW Vcc Low. Less than 4.632 Volts. 1. Replace main PCB.
2. Return to factory.
Vref HIGH Vref high. Over 4.240 Volts. 1. Replace main PCB.
2. Return to factory.
Vref LOW Vref low. Less than 3.964 Volts. 1. Replace main PCB.
2. Return to factory.
WD ALARM Watchdog has fired. 1. Replace main PCB.
2. Return to factory.
WD EARLY ERROR Watchdog didn’t fire when stroked early (start-up). 1. Replace main PCB.
2. Return to factory.
WD FORCE ERROR Watchdog didn’t fire when forced (start-up). 1. Replace main PCB.
2. Return to factory.
WD LATE ERROR Watchdog didn’t fire when stroked late(start-up). 1. Replace main PCB.
2. Return to factory.

WD MOTOR ON Watchdog couldn’t disable motor (start-up). 1. Replace main PCB.

2. Return to factory.

WD MTR OFF ERROR Watchdog couldn’t disable motor (start-up). 1. Replace main PCB.
2. Return to factory.

WD RESET OFF Watchdog power-on test failed. 1. Replace main PCB.

ERROR 2. Return to factory.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 6-9
Technical Service Manual
TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 6-3. Battery Manager Error Codes (not in Alarm History)

The following error codes relate to codes displayed in the lower LCD. These codes are not stored in
memory. The steps in the “Remedy” column are listed in the sequence in which the specified actions
are to be taken.

MESSAGE PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY

ERR 1 - ROM CRC Battery Manager code failure. 1. Replace main PCB.
2. Return to factory.
ERR 2 - RAM TEST Battery Manager code failure. 1. Replace main PCB.
2. Return to factory.
ERR 3 - CPU Battery Manager code failure. 1. Replace main PCB.
2. Return to factory.
ERR 4 - WATCHDOG ONE-SHOT Watchdog circuit logic failure. 1. Replace main PCB.
TIMINGS 2. Return to factory.
ERR 5 - ON/OFF FLIP-FLOP Cannot set/clear flip-flop 1. Replace main PCB.
WRONG STATE condition. 2. Return to factory.
ERR 6 - CURRENT INTEGRATOR Battery current monitor circuit 1. Charge battery.
bad or system has excess 2. Replace battery.
current draw. 3. Replace main PCB.
4. Return to factory.
BATT Battery temperature outside 1. Disconnect and reconnect battery
0° - 60°C or battery voltage to initiate a refresh cycle.
<10V or >18.8V. 2. Replace battery.
3. Replace main PCB.
4. Return to factory.

6-10 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 TROUBLESHOOTING

6.2 DIAGNOSTICS MODE

The Diagnostic Mode allows a RUN
HOLD
hospital/facility to manage periodic
preventive maintenance of the instrument
and view the instrument's history. It allows
ml/hr
testing of functions and entry of the ? PRI SEC KVO

instrument's ID number. For quick PRI SEC

?
reference, a map of all diagnostic screens is
located at the end of this chapter.
Pressing a soft key at the side of the main
display the first time selects it for editing.
Some features are edited by subsequent
presses of the soft key to cycle through 1 2 3
available options. Other features are edited
4 5 6
by means of the numeric keypad.
7 8 9
NOTE: Pressing undo or cancel will undo . 0 C
any edits made to that page, and stay on the
page. Pressing ok will accept all information
on the page, and return to the menu page.

6.2.1 Entering Diagnostics Mode

The instrument must be off (both channels NOTE: Some 7131/7231 keypads use
on a dual channel instrument). symbols instead of words.

Though the figures in this procedure depict

a single channel instrument, the procedure
for the dual channel instrument is the same.
Channel-specific items will display "A" or "B"
in upper left corner.
1. Press and hold left-top display soft key.
A B OPTIONS
2. Press and release POWER switch.
Continue to press display soft key until Diagnostics Mode D
Diagnostic Mode display appears, then ID No. : 987654321 1
release. SW Rev.: 04.08
PM Due : 52 weeks
Page D1 of Diagnostics Mode is
displayed. This is a read-only display. page

3. Press page to advance to page to be

configured.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 6-11
Technical Service Manual
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.2 DIAGNOSTICS MODE (Continued) 5. Use numeric keypad to enter desired

maintenance interval (1 to 52 weeks).
6.2.2 Setting Preventive Maintenance Press enter. Setting PM Interval always
Interval resets PM Due to same value as PM
The preventive maintenance reminder is a Interval.
message that appears upon start-up, • PM Due decrements with calendar time
indicating the maintenance cycle has and is displayed to the nearest week.
elapsed. If the reminder message is
• Pressing Reset PM Due soft key resets
bypassed, the instrument will operate as
the PM Due to the displayed PM
normal but the reminder will continue to
Interval.
appear at start-up until it is reset.
1. Advance to D2 page. 1 2 3
4 5 6

A B OPTIONS 7 8 9
. 0 Clear Enter
PM Setup D
History 2 6. Press ok to accept change and return to
Set Time
beginning of D2 page.
Battery Status
page A B OPTIONS

PM Reminder= On D
PM Interval = 52 wks 2
PM Due= 52 wks
2. Press PM Setup soft key.
Reset PM Due
3. Press and release PM Reminder soft
undo ok
key to cycle between On and Off.
A B OPTIONS

PM Reminder= On D
PM Interval = 52 wks 2
PM Due= 52 wks
Reset PM Due
undo ok

4. Press PM Interval soft key.

6-12 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 TROUBLESHOOTING

6.2 DIAGNOSTICS MODE (Continued) NOTES:

6.2.3 Viewing Alarm or Event History • History Log will keep 1500 entries in
(Event Log) memory. Entry 0001 will be most
recent and entry 1500 will be oldest.
No More Events will be displayed if
A B OPTIONS less than 1500 events are recorded.

PM Setup D • Memory will clear when new main

History 2 software is installed.
Set Time 2. To scroll to previous/next event screen
Battery Status press page soft key. (Events are listed
page on a last in, first out basis.)
3. Press return soft key to return to D2
page.

1. From D2 page, press History soft key. NOTE: If AC and battery power are
disconnected from the instrument, event
• For mode/state changes, first line will
history may be lost.
read Misc. Inst. (Miscellaneous
Instruction). Key Inst. will be
displayed to indicate a key/switch
activation. Alarms and errors may be
channel-specific or instrument related,
which will also appear on first line.
• Second line will give month, day, year,
hour and minute that entry/event took
place.
• Third line will show event/entry that
occurred.

Following is a list of entries and samples of displays.

Alarms:
ALL
Errors:
ALL
User Initiated Events:
Alarm Cleared Panel Unlocked
Channel Off Silence On
Channel On Latch Open
Configuration Complete AC Connected
Diagnostic Complete AC Disconnected
Panel Locked

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 6-13
Technical Service Manual
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.2 DIAGNOSTICS MODE (Continued)

6.2.3 Viewing Alarm or Event History (Event Log) (Continued)

Data Entry Events:

Dose (Rate) Calc VTBI Set to xxxx.x mL Dose (Rate) Calc Set to Off
Load (Dose) VTBI Set to xxxx.x mL Load VTBI Set to xxxx.x mL
Primary VTBI Set to Off Secondary VTBI Set to xxx.x mL
Vi Cleared Dose Rate Set to xxxxx uuu
Drug Amount Set to ccccc uuu Diluent Volume Set to xxxx mL
Patient Weight Set to xxxxx uuu Patient Height (DRC) Set to xxx uuu
Set Time Dose Rate Drug Name
Infusion State Change Events:
Dose (Rate) Running at xxx.x mL/h (Multi) Dose Started at xxx.x mL/h
In KVO at xx.x mL/h Loading (Dose) Running at xxx.x mL/h
Multi-Dose Complete On Hold, VI = xxx.x mL
Primary Running at xxx.x mL/h Secondary Running at xxx.x mL/h
(Mult) Step Started at xxx.x mL/h Timer Started, VI = xxxx.x mL
Timer Stopped, VI = xxxx.x mL
Notifications:
Battery refresh Battery Low
Computer Released Memory Erased
Pressure Restart Preventative Maintenance Reminder
Resistance Restart Resistance Alert
Self-Check required Software Shutdown
Upstream Occlusion restart VI = xxxx.x mL (logged every hour while infusing)
Keys Logged:
Audio Left Soft Key 1 Run/Hold A Three
Bottom Soft Key 1 Left Soft Key 2 Run/Hold B Four
Bottom Soft Key 2 Left Soft Key 3 Secondary Five
Bottom Soft Key 3 Left Soft Key 4 Select A Six
Clear On/Off A Select B Seven
Decimal Point On/Off B Silence Eight
Enter Options Split Screen Nine
Hidden Key 1 Panel Lock One Zero
Hidden Key 2 Primary Two
Configuration Events Logged:
Air-inLine Accumulator Enable/Disable Multi-Dose Mode Enable/Disable
Air-in-Line Reset Enable/Disable Multi-Step Mode Enable/Disable
Computer Link Mode Changed Pressure Alarm Fixed/Adjustable
Default Monitoring Option Changed Pressure Display On/Off
Dose Rate Calculator Mode Enable/Disable Resistance Alert On/Off
Dose Rate Drug List Items Changed Resistance Display On/Off
Loading Dose Mode Enable/Disable Trend Graphs Enable/Disable
Manual Baseline Option On/Off VTBI On/Off
Multi-Dose Alert Enable/Disable

6-14 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 TROUBLESHOOTING

6.2 DIAGNOSTICS MODE (Continued)

6.2.3 Viewing Alarm or Event History (Event Log) (Continued)

Guardrails® Safety Software Events:

GR DRUG NAME IS
HARD DOSE LIMIT HIGH
HARD DOSE LIMIT LOW
SOFT DOSE LIMIT HIGH
SOFT DOSE LIMIT LOW
DOSE OVERRIDE YES
DOSE OVERRIDE NO
MAX PATIENT WEIGHT
MAX RATE EVENT
DRUG SELECT-CANCELED
PROFILES OFF
PROFILES ON
EVENT COUNTER RESET
NEW DATASET LOADED
DATASET CLEARED

Display Examples

A B OPTIONS A B OPTIONS

0002 Misc. Inst. D 0001 Misc. Chan. A D

JUN 5, 2001 15:48 2 JUN 5, 2001 15:48 2
BATT REFRESH CHANNEL OFF

return page return page

A B OPTIONS A B OPTIONS

0008 Misc. Inst. D 0006 ALARM INST. D

JUN 4, 2001 14:30 2 JUN 4, 2001 18:27 2
AC Unplugged BATTERY DEPLETED

return page return page

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 6-15
Technical Service Manual
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.2 DIAGNOSTICS MODE (Continued) • Year setting is four digits and will
accept year entries of 2000 and
6.2.4 Setting Time (and Date) beyond. Default date and time is
Jan 1, 1970 00:00
A B OPTIONS • Software clock may lose up to 3
minutes per month. Reset time as
PM Setup D part of Preventive Maintenance or
History 2 more often, as desired.
Set Time
Battery Status • When clock is reset for current
date/time, previous logs will not be
page adjusted retroactively, but will remain
the same.
• Clock will NOT automatically adjust
1. On D2 page, press Set Time soft key. for time changes, such as, daylight
savings.
2. Press Month soft key to highlight. Press
Month soft key as needed to get desired 6. Press ok to accept change and return to
month. beginning of D2 page. Press Undo soft
key to reinstate time/date.
A B OPTIONS
NOTE: Information stored in the Flash
Month Jun D EEPROM will not be lost when Version
Date 5 2 4.08 software is flashed into the
Year 2004 instrument. This includes Rate
Calibration, Pressure Calibration, ID
Time 15 hrs 49 min number (serial number), time/date and
Undo ok PM data.

6.2.5 Viewing Battery Status

3. Press Date soft key to highlight. Enter
date on keypad and press Enter.
4. Press Year soft key to highlight. Enter A B OPTIONS

year on keypad and press Enter.

PM Setup D
5. Press Time soft key to highlight hours History 2
(military time, 24 hours) on keypad and Set Time
press Enter. If the value for hours is Battery Status
correct and only minutes are to be
page
changed, press Time soft key again to
highlight minutes.

6-16 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 TROUBLESHOOTING

6.2 DIAGNOSTICS MODE (Continued)

A B OPTIONS

6.2.5 Viewing Battery Status (Continued) PM Setup D

1. On D2 page, press Battery Status soft History 2
key. Set Time
Battery Status
Voltage may range from 10V to 18V.
Ampere-hours may range from 0.0 page
to 3.0.
NOTE: Voltage will flash when updated
by software.
1. On D2 page, press and release Battery
2. Press return soft key to return to D2
Status soft key.
page.
2. Press and release Rated Capacity soft
A B OPTIONS key to highlight.
Batt. Mgr. 3.06 D
Voltage : 14.4volts 2 A B OPTIONS

Meas Cap : 1.8 AH Batt. Mgr. 3.06 D

Rated Cap : 1.8 AH Voltage : 14.4volts 2
undo ok Meas Cap : 1.8 AH
Rated Cap : 1.8 AH
Undo ok
6.2.6 Changing Rated Capacity of Battery
This step is only required if a different type
or different capacity battery is later 3. Use numeric keypad to enter rated
approved for use. As long as battery is capacity of new battery. Press Enter.
NiCad and rated at 1.3 Ah, no action is
required. 1 2 3
4 5 6
NOTE: Battery is rated at 1.8 Ah under ideal
7 8 9
conditions. 1.3 Ah will be entered here to
help compensate for uneven cell capacity . 0 Clear Enter

and ensure getting a "low battery alarm" with

30 minutes or more use on battery.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 6-17
Technical Service Manual
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.2 DIAGNOSTICS MODE (Continued) 3. Press return soft key to return to D3

page.
6.2.6 Changing Rated Capacity of Battery
(Continued) 6.2.8 Setting ID Number

OPTIONS
An ID number may be useful for asset
A B tracking, maintenance records, etc.
Batt. Mgr, 3.06 D
Voltage : 14.4volts 2 A B OPTIONS
Meas Cap : 1.8 AH
Rated Cap: 1.3 AH DC Voltages D
Set ID Number 3
undo ok Run Times
Self-Check Timer
page
4. Press ok to accept change and return to
beginning of D2 page.

6.2.7 Viewing DC Voltages 1. On D3 page, press Set. ID Number soft

key.
1. Advance to D3 page.
2. Press bottom-left soft key to highlight.
A B OPTIONS
OPTIONS
A B
DC Voltages D
Set ID Number Instrument D
3 Identification
Run Times 3
Number =
Self-Check Timer
12345678
page
undo ok

2. Press DC Voltages soft key.

3. Use numeric keypad to enter desired
A B OPTIONS
identification number. Press Enter.
DC VOLTAGES D
NOTE: The ID Number can be up to 9
ADREF = 4.100 v 3 digits.
VBACKUP= 5.000 v
VCC= 5.000 v
return

6-18 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 TROUBLESHOOTING

6.2 DIAGNOSTICS MODE (Continued)

A B OPTIONS

6.2.8 Setting ID Number (Continued)

Run Times D
Battery : 20 hrs 3
1 2 3
Total : 189 hrs
4 5 6
Clear Battery Time
7 8 9
. undo ok
0 Clear Enter

4. Press ok to accept change and return to

beginning of D3 page. 2. Press Clear Battery Time soft key to
clear battery run time. (Total run time will
NOTE: Information stored in the EEPROM
will not be lost when Version 4.08 software is
not clear.)
flashed into the instrument. This includes 3. Press ok to accept change and return to
Rate Calibration, Pressure Calibration, ID beginning of D3 page.
number (serial number), time/date and PM
data. 6.2.10 Viewing Self-Check Timer
6.2.9 Viewing Battery and Total Run Times The self-check timer is an interval at which
the software checks the pressure sensor
1. On D3 page, press Run Times soft key. offset drift when it can be determined a set
is not loaded and no other external forces
A B OPTIONS
are being applied to the pressure sensor.
DC Voltages D This periodic check ensures the set can be
Set ID Number 3 sensed as it is installed and removed. The
Run Times instrument will give instructions to remove
Self-Check Timer the set before powering down.
page
A B OPTIONS

DC Voltages D
Set ID Number 3
Run Times
Self-Check Timer
page

1. On D3 page, press Self - Check Timer

soft key.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 6-19
Technical Service Manual
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.2 DIAGNOSTICS MODE (Continued) Please Eject the Set," this 12-week interval
has elapsed. If that occurs:
6.2.10 Viewing Self-Check Timer (Continued)
1. Turn instrument on and install set.
2. Verify interval is set to 12 weeks.
2. Wait one minute.
A B OPTIONS 3. Remove set and watch screen for a
message that self-check is in progress.
Self-Check D
Interval = 12 weeks 3 4. When test is done, screen will go back to
parameter page, and instrument
operation can continue as desired.

undo ok 6.2.11 Testing Channel Sensors

1. Advance to D4 page.

A B OPTIONS

3. Press ok to return to beginning of D3

page. Test A Sensors D
Cal A Rate 4
NOTES: Test B Sensors
Cal B Rate
• This setting is factory set (4 to 12 weeks)
and should NOT be changed. This page
feature can be enabled/disabled via
Diagnostics Mode on D7 Page.
• If a self-check due message appears,
press continue to keep the instrument
running. 2. Press Test A Sensors or Test B
Sensors soft key (dual channel
The self-check timer is set to 12 weeks. instrument).
This is a rolling 12-week interval. To • Display reads “D4A” or “D4B”
establish a new 12-week period, remove the depending on which channel was
set with the instrument power on and wait selected.
one to two seconds before turning the
power off. Refer to “Calibrating Channel • M Flag reads Light or Dark (Dark with
Pressure” section for a sample display 5th cam in).
showing the number of hours since the last • Latch reads Open or Closed.
self-check was performed.
• AIL reads Air or Fluid.
Ensure the instrument is on when the set is
removed, wait one to two seconds, and then • ECD reads Air, Fluid, Unplugged or
power off. If the instrument is powered off Not Installed.
without following this sequence of steps, it
will not run on the next power up. If the
instrument displays, "Self Check is Due.

6-20 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 TROUBLESHOOTING

6.2 DIAGNOSTICS MODE (Continued)

A B OPTIONS

6.2.11 Testing Channel Sensors (Continued) Test A Sensors D

Cal A Rate 4
Displayed: Means: Test B Sensors
Cal B Rate
Not ECD board assembly page
Installed not installed.

Unplugged ECD board assembly

installed. Flow sensor 2. Press Cal A Rate or Cal B Rate soft key,
not connected. depending on which channel is to be
Air ECD board assembly viewed.
installed. Flow sensor
detects air. A B OPTIONS

Fluid ECD board assembly Rate D

installed. Flow sensor Calibration 4
detects fluid. Cal # = 1.2 %
Rate= 171.9 mcL/rev
ok
A B OPTIONS

M Flag = Light D
Latch = Open 4
AIL = Air A 3. To change Rate Cal # (%), press Rate
ECD = Not Installed soft key two times.
return • Instrument will beep but display will
not change.
4. Press Cal # soft key to highlight and
select for editing.
3. Press return soft key to return to D4
page. 5. Change Cal # based on results of
calibration rate run (refer to “Rate
6.2.12 Viewing/Changing Rate Calibration Calibration Procedure” section in
Information “Preventive Maintenance” chapter).
Use the following procedure to view or
change the Rate Cal # setting.
1. Advance to D4 page.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 6-21
Technical Service Manual
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.2 DIAGNOSTICS MODE (Continued)

A B OPTIONS

6.2.12 Viewing/Changing Rate Calibration Test Main LCD D

Information (Continued) Test Aux. LCD 5
Test Switches
Main LCD Contrast
A B OPTIONS

page
Rate D
Calibration 4
Cal # = 0.0 %
Rate= 174.0 mcL/rev
2. Press Test Main LCD soft key.
undo +/- ok • Test consists of Main LCD alternating
between normal and reverse video
every 2 seconds.
• All LEDs also flash on and off at a
6. Press Enter then ok to accept change or 2-second rate.
press undo to return to old cal number.
A B OPTIONS
NOTES:
• Information stored in the EEPROM will
MAIN D
not be lost when Version 4.08 software
LCD 5
is flashed into the instrument. This TEST
includes Rate calibration, Pressure
Calibration, ID number (serial number),
return
time/date and PM data.
• Once the Rate Cal # is set to 0.0 and
accepted, the instrument will need to
be run for at least 2 seconds before
3. Press return soft key to return to D5
the Rate Cal # can be changed to a
non-zero value. If not, the instrument
page.
will display “Do Rate Accuracy Test at
0%”. The instrument will not allow one 6.2.14 Testing Aux (Lower) LCD
non-zero value to be changed to
another non-zero value. A B OPTIONS

6.2.13 Testing Main LCD Test Main LCD D

Test Aux. LCD 5
1. Advance to D5 page. Test Switches
Main LCD Contrast
page

6-22 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 TROUBLESHOOTING

6.2 DIAGNOSTICS MODE (Continued) 1. On D5 page, press Test Switches soft

key.
6.2.14 Testing Aux (Lower) LCD (Continued)
2. Proceed to press all keys on instrument.
1. On D5 page, press Test Aux. LCD soft
• As a key is pressed, key's name will
key.
appear.
• This tests Lower LCD display, lighting
• Proper functionality of return soft key
all display segments.
is tested only by key performing its
function; for example, returning LCD
to D5 page.
• When POWER key is pressed, it will
GOLD MNTR
display “Press and hold key to turn
off”.

A B OPTIONS

Switch Pressed = D
Left Soft Key 2 5
A B OPTIONS

AUXILIARY D
LCD 5 return
TEST

return
3. Press return soft key to return to D5
page.

2. Press return soft key to return to D5 6.2.16 Changing Main LCD Contrast
page.

6.2.15 Testing Switches

A B OPTIONS

A B OPTIONS
Test Main LCD D
Test Aux. LCD 5
Test Main LCD D Test Switches
Test Aux. LCD 5 Main LCD Contrast
Test Switches
page
Main LCD Contrast
page

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 6-23
Technical Service Manual
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.2 DIAGNOSTICS MODE (Continued)

A B OPTIONS

6.2.16 Changing Main LCD Contrast Main LCD Contrast = D

(Continued) 127 5
1. On D5 page, press Main LCD Contrast
soft key.
undo ok
A B OPTIONS

Main LCD Contrast = D

127 5
4. Press ok to accept changes and return to
beginning of D5 page.

undo ok 6.2.17 Calibrating Channel Pressure

1. Install a Pressure Cal Set (70ISS) to
apply pressure to each channel. Allow
instrument to warm up for a minimum of
2. Press soft key next to contrast number to
30 minutes while in Diagnostics Mode.
highlight.
1 2 3
A B OPTIONS

4 5 6
Cal A Pressure D
7 8 9
DAC A Settings 6
. 0 Clear Enter
Cal B Pressure
DAC B Settings
3. Use numeric keypad to enter desired
LCD contrast (contrast range is 1 to 256). page
Press Enter.

NOTE: Decreasing number lightens

contrast.
2. On D6 page, press Cal A Pressure or
Cal B Pressure (dual channel).
D6A or D6B will be displayed, depending
on which channel was selected.

6-24 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 TROUBLESHOOTING

6.2 DIAGNOSTICS MODE (Continued) c. Install a standard set and close latch.
Verify reading is over 170.
6.2.17 Calibrating Channel Pressure
d. Verify Sensor = reading is in -80 to
(Continued)
+30 mmHg range. If instrument will
3. Both "0" and "500" should display a not soft cal, perform Hard Pressure
number and read Pass. Sensor= should Cal Procedure (see “Corrective
have a value between -80 and +30 Maintenance” chapter).
(mmHgs), with no set installed. If Xs
appear or sensor reading is out of range, NOTE: Information stored in the
instrument will require soft pressure EEPROM will not be lost when Version
calibration, as follows (for setup, 4.08 software is flashed into the
reference “Preventive Maintenance” instrument. This includes Rate
Calibration, Pressure calibration, ID
chapter):
number (serial number), time/date and
PM data.
A B OPTIONS

5. Additional messages for pressure

Calibrate Pressure D calibration include:
0 mmHg=1175 Pass 6
500 mmHg=2400 Pass A • COMPLETE PRESS CAL - need to
Sensor=+001 Pass do both "0" and "500" pressure cal
points.
ok
• FAIL 500 LOW/HIGH LIMIT -
pressure reading seen by ADC is out
of range. Retry soft pressure cal,
a. Adjust pressure to "0 mmHg" from test perform hard cal, replace mechanism
fixture. Press and release or return to ALARIS Medical Systems
0 mmHg soft key. If readings are in a for repair.
valid range, it will display Pass.
• FAIL ZERO LOW/HIGH LIMIT -
b. Apply 500 mmHg (±2 mmHg) from pressure reading seen by ADC is out
test fixture. Press and release of range. Retry soft pressure cal,
500 mmHg soft key. If readings are in perform hard cal, replace mechanism
a valid range, it will display Pass. or return to ALARIS Medical Systems
c. Remove 500 mmHg pressure applied for repair.
to instrument, then remove set. • FAIL ZERO LOW/HIGH RANGE -
d. Press ok soft key to accept calibration pressure reading is outside relative
and return to main D6 page. limits. Retry soft pressure cal,
perform hard cal, replace mechanism
4. Set sensor check/calibration verification: or return to ALARIS Medical Systems
a. On D6 page press Cal A Pressure or for repair.
Cal B Pressure (dual channel).
b. Verify both 0 mmHg and 500 mmHg
readings display Pass.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 6-25
Technical Service Manual
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.2 DIAGNOSTICS MODE (Continued)

A B OPTIONS

6.2.17 Calibrating Channel Pressure Calibrate Pressure D

(Continued) 0 mmHg=1175100 Pass 6
• SENSOR TOO NOISY - electrical 500 mmHg=2400 Pass A
interference is detected in pressure 0374 1136adc 0169h
signal. Retry soft pressure cal,
perform hard cal, replace mechanism undo ok
or return to ALARIS Medical Systems
for repair.
Reference “Hard Pressure Cal • Number on left represents number
Procedure” in “Corrective of times self-check has been
Maintenance” chapter. performed since last soft pressure
6. Messages that require an instrument to calibration.
be returned to ALARIS Medical Systems • Center number represents zero
for repair or mechanism replacement are: pressure reading at time of last
FAIL SENSOR GAIN LOW/HIGH self-check.

FAIL VBRIDGE LOW/HIGH • Number on right represents

number of hours since last self-
XDCR TEST FAIL LOW/HIGH check was performed. If this
ZERO RANGE TOO SMALL exceeds 2016 hours, “Self Check is
Due, Please Eject the Set” will be
7. Additional self-check information may displayed.
also be viewed.
c. Press lower left soft key again.
a. Press Sensor = soft key.
A B OPTIONS
A B OPTIONS

Calibrate Pressure D
Calibrate Pressure D
0 mmHg=1175 Pass 0 mmHg=1175 Pass 6
6
500 mmHg=2400 Pass A 500 mmHg=2400 Pass A
Sensor=+001 Pass Offset=-10 mmHg
ok ok

b. Pass will be displayed. Press soft key

again.
• Three numbers will appear on last
line in display window.

6-26 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 TROUBLESHOOTING

6.2 DIAGNOSTICS MODE (Continued) e. Press ok soft key to return to main D6

page or press lower left soft key again
6.2.17 Calibrating Channel Pressure to return to Sensor = value.
(Continued)
6.2.18 DAC Settings
Offset level will be displayed. This
value is used to help determine when 1. On D6 page, press DAC A Settings or
instrument will go into a SET OUT DAC B Settings (dual channel) soft key.
alarm. With Auto-Zero feature on
(enabled - automatically through A B OPTIONS
Diagnostic Mode factory default), level
must be less than 55 mmHg. Offset Cal A Pressure D
level plus Sensor = value (looked at in DAC A Settings 6
step 3) should equal less than 55 Cal B Pressure
mmHg (with no set installed), to DAC B Settings
prevent SET OUT alarm. page
NOTE: Offset level is updated when
instrument does SELF CHECK on set
eject. This level will be set to zero
when soft pressure calibration is • D6A or D6B will be displayed,
performed.
depending on which channel was
d. Press lower left soft key again. selected.

A B OPTIONS NOTE: The display illustrated below is for a

transducer that is not yet available (as of the
Calibrate Pressure D date of this manual). The DAC transducer
0 mmHg=1175 Pass 6 will automatically perform hard pressure
500 mmHg=2400 Pass A calibration when soft pressure calibration is
completed. When the new transducer is
Count=1070
available, it will be part of the mechanism
ok assembly and sensed by the software. Do
not, at the present time, change these
settings.
Count number will be displayed. This
number is uncompensated sensor
A B OPTIONS
value in ADC counts and number that
will be used to perform hard pressure DAC Settings D
calibration. This number should be DAC Mode: DISABLED 6
between 875 and 1275 (with no set Target DAC =1100 A
installed); if not, a hard pressure
calibration should be performed (see
“Hard Pressure Cal Procedure” ok
section in “Corrective Maintenance”
chapter).

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 6-27
Technical Service Manual
TROUBLESHOOTING

Figure 6-1. Map of Diagnostic Screens

6.2 DIAGNOSTICS MODE (Continued)

6.2.19 Configuring Pressure System Auto A B OPTIONS

Zero
Diagnostics Mode D
1. Press upper left soft key to access Auto ID No. : 987654321 1
Zero option.
SW Rev.: 04.08
PM Due : 52 weeks
A B OPTIONS

page
Pressure System D
Boot Rev: 01.02 7

A B OPTIONS

page
Diagnostics Mode D
Diagnostics 1
Communications
Active
2. Press Auto Zero soft key to highlight
settings. Press Auto Zero soft key again
to change between On and Off.

A B OPTIONS
A B OPTIONS

AUTO ZERO = OFF D PM Setup D

7 History 2
Set Time
Battery Status
undo ok page

A B OPTIONS
3. Press ok to accept change and return to
main D7 page. Press undo to return to PM Reminder= On D
previous setting. PM Interval = 52 wks 2
PM Due= 52 wks
NOTE: The Boot Rev: xxxx refers to the Reset PM Due
flash EPROM boot program and cannot
be changed. undo ok

6-28 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Figure 6-1. Map of Diagnostic Screens (Continued)

A B OPTIONS

A B OPTIONS
DC VOLTAGES D
ADREF = 4.100 v 3
0001 Misc. Chan. A D
JUN 5, 2001 15:48 VBACKUP= 5.000 v
2
CHANNEL OFF VCC= 5.000 v
return
return page

OPTIONS
A B
A B OPTIONS
Instrument D
Identification 3
Month Jun D
Date 5 Number =
2
12345678
Year 2004
Time 15 hrs 49 min undo ok
Undo ok

A B OPTIONS

A B OPTIONS
Run Times D
Battery : 20 hrs 3
Batt. Mgr, 3.06 D
Total : 189 hrs
Voltage : 14.4volts 2
Clear Battery Time
Meas Cap : 1.8 AH
Rated Cap: 1.3 AH undo ok
undo ok

A B OPTIONS

A B OPTIONS Self-Check D
Interval = 12 weeks 3
DC Voltages D
Set ID Number 3
Run Times
Self-Check Timer undo ok

page

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 6-29
Technical Service Manual
TROUBLESHOOTING

Figure 6-1. Map of Diagnostic Screens (Continued)

A B OPTIONS

A B OPTIONS
MAIN D
Test A Sensors D LCD 5
Cal A Rate 4 TEST
Test B Sensors
Cal B Rate return
page

A B OPTIONS

A B OPTIONS AUXILIARY D
LCD 5
M Flag = Light D TEST
Latch = Open 4
AIL = Air A
ECD = Not Installed return

return

A B OPTIONS

A B OPTIONS Switch Pressed = D

Left Soft Key 2 5
Rate D
Calibration 4
Cal # = 1.2 %
Rate= 171.9 mcL/rev return
ok

A B OPTIONS

A B OPTIONS
Main LCD Contrast = D
Test Main LCD D 127 5
Test Aux. LCD 5
Test Switches
Main LCD Contrast ok
undo
page

6-30 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Figure 6-1. Map of Diagnostic Screens (Continued)

A B OPTIONS

Cal A Pressure D
DAC A Settings 6
Cal B Pressure
DAC B Settings
page

A B OPTIONS

Calibrate Pressure D
0 mmHg=1175 Pass 6
500 mmHg=2400 Pass A
Sensor=+001 Pass
ok

A B OPTIONS

Pressure System D
Boot Rev: 01.02 7

page

A B OPTIONS

AUTO ZERO = OFF D

7

undo ok

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 6-31
Technical Service Manual
TROUBLESHOOTING

T H I S PA G E
I N T E N T I O N A L LY
LEFT BLANK

6-32 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
7 ILLUSTRATED PARTS
BREAKDOWN
Chapter 7 — ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

7.1 INTRODUCTION
The illustrated parts breakdown for the
instrument is divided into major assemblies
and individual parts.

7.2 ILLUSTRATIONS
The exploded views serve as visual aids for
identifying the parts of each assembly. If a
part/assembly is identified with an item
number (appearing in a bubble), that number
corresponds to the item number on the parts
list. If a part/assembly is not identified with
an item number, it is part of a higher
assembly or kit.

NOTE: Due to instrument changes over time,

components/assemblies illustrated in this
chapter may be different than those in the
instrument being disassembled. If there are
any questions, look for Service Bulletins
related to this chapter or contact ALARIS
Medical Systems, Technical Support.

7.3 PARTS LIST

The parts lists provide the following
information for saleable parts and
assemblies.
ITEM: This number corresponds with item
number in illustration.
PART NUMBER: This is the ALARIS
Medical Systems number, needed when
placing an order. There are two categories
of part numbers, as follows:
• Custom built parts all have 1 XXXXX
series part numbers.
• Commercially available parts all have
3XXXXX or 8XXXXX series numbers. It
is recommended that such parts be
purchased from ALARIS Medical Systems
whenever possible.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 7-1
Technical Service Manual
ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

7.3 Parts List (Continued)

PART NUMBER (Continued)
When a part number is not provided, that
part is either not sold by ALARIS Medical
Systems or can only be replaced/repaired
by ALARIS Medical Systems authorized
service personnel.
DESCRIPTION: Descriptive information
that may be helpful when placing an order.
QTY: Total number of each item used.

7.4 ORDERING PARTS

Parts can be ordered by writing or calling
ALARIS Medical Systems Customer Service
(refer to “General Contact Information” page
at the beginning of this manual). When
requesting a part, provide the following
information:
• Instrument name and model number.
• Instrument software version. Refer to
applicable Signature Edition® GOLD
Infusion System Directions for Use (DFU)
for directions on viewing software
version.
• Part number.
• Part description, as provided in parts list.
• For labels, specify required language.

7-2 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Table 7-1. Other Parts

Item Part Number Description* QTY

148023-100 Kit, Flash, S/W, 4.08

148134-100 Kit , Flash, S/W, 2.78

133450 Learn/Teach Cable 1

136111 Nurse Call Cable (7130X, 7230X only) A/R

301044 Tie Strap A/R

70ISS Pressure Cal Set A/R

80VCS Rate Calibration Set A/R

145096 Kit , Flow Sensor / ECD, 713X

145097 Kit , Flow Sensor / ECD, 723X

145094 Kit , Flow Sensor / Handle Cap, 7131 / 7130

145095 Kit , Flow Sensor / Handle Cap, 7231 / 7230

NOTE: If model is not specified, the part can be used on all versions.
* 7130X = 7130B, 7130D, 7130E 120V Version; 7131X = 7131A, 7131B 220V Version;
7230X = 7230B, 7230D, 7230E 120V Version.

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 7-3
Technical Service Manual
ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Table 7-2. Case Assembly

Item Part Number Description QTY

090 141788 Battery Pack, Conditioned 1

250 141496-100 Case Front, Single Channel (order keypad, labels and feet separately)
141498-100 Case Front, Dual Channel (order keypad, labels and feet separately)
300 144375 Case Rear, Assy Single Channel (7130) (order keypad, labels and feet
separately)
144126 Case Rear, Assy Single Channel (7131) (order keypad, labels and feet
separately)
144376 Case Rear, Assy Dual Channel (7230) (order keypad, labels and feet
separately)
144127 Case Rear, Assy Dual Channel (7231) (order keypad, labels and feet
separately)
305 141717 Screen Handle, Single Channel 2
141689 Screen Handle, Dual Channel
399 142578 Single Channel Case Seal 1
142579 Dual Channel Case Seal
403 147949-100 Kit, Power Cord Wrap 1
406* 320919 M3 x 10mm Phillips Flat Head Screw 1
409* 980-1015-1 Power Cord Wrap 1
410* 809061 Eyelet Stud Snap 1
413 136777 Battery Door 1
414 140444-000 Power Cord Holder (7131 / 7231 only) 1
420 148450-100 Power Cord Kit (7130, 7230 comes with holder) 1
134745 Power Cord, EUR (7131X / 7231X, 220V)
134748 Power Cord, UK (7131X / 7231X, 220V)
435 136761 Handle Cap, Single Channel without Flow Sensor Holder 1
136762 Handle Cap, Dual Channel without Flow Sensor Holder
141104 Handle Cap, Single Channel with Flow Sensor Holder
141105 Handle Cap, Dual Channel with Flow Sensor Holder
437 140718 Cover, Conn, Flow Sensor, SE A/R
463 305237 Screw, Mach, M3 x 10mm, PH 3
464 305235 Screw, Mach, M3 x 16mm, PH 1

* Included in item 403 - Power Cord Wrap Kit.

7-4 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-1. Power Cord Wrap Kit (Item 403)

406

410

409

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 7-5
Technical Service Manual
ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-2a. Case Assembly, Single Channel

90
7 PL 464 435

2 PL 305 300
437

463
399
414

250 413
403

420

7-6 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-2b. Case Assembly, Dual Channel

90
435
7 PL 464
300
437 2 PL

2 PL 305
463
414
399
413
403
250

420

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 7-7
Technical Service Manual
ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Table 7-3. Front Case Assembly

Item Part Number Description QTY

040 143251-001 Keypad, Main, 7130 1

143252-001 Keypad, Main, 7230
143255-001 Keypad, Main, ENG, 7131
143256-001 Keypad, Main, ENG, 7231
143253-001 Keypad, Main, Global, Symbols only, 7131
143254-001 Keypad, Main, Global, Symbols only, 7231 2
146618-002 Keypad, Main, UK, Primary only, 7131
146619-002 Keypad, Main, UK, Primary only, 7231 1
055 144308 Single Channel Board Assembly 2.78, 7130B
144128 Single Channel Board Assembly 2.78, 7131A 1
147941-100 Single Channel Board Assembly 4.06, 7130D 1
147941-101 Single Channel Board Assembly 4.08, 7130E, 7131B 1
144307 Dual Channel Board Assembly 2.78, 7230B 1
144129 Dual Channel Board Assembly 2.78, 7230A
147942-100 Dual Channel Board Assembly 4.06, 7230D
147942-101 Dual Channel Board Assembly 4.08, 7230E, 7231B 1
070 142850 LCD Module, Graphic 1
080 142475 LCD Module, Lower 1
100 141004 LED Module 1
201 141468 Mechanism Assembly 1 or 2
250 141496-100 Case, Front, Single Channel (order keypad, label and feet separately) 1
141498-100 Case Kit, Front, Dual Channel (order keypad, label and feet separately)
416 305318 Rubber Feet 2
463 305237 Screw, Mach, M3 x 10mm, PNH 1

NOTE: If model is not specified, the part can be used on all versions.

7-8 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-3a. Front Case Assembly, Single Channel

100

463
0 700

250

0 550

0 400

201

0 800

416 2 PL

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 7-9
Technical Service Manual
ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-3b. Front Case Assembly, Dual Channel

100 2 PL
463

250

0 550

0 700

0 800

201 2 PL

416 2 PL
0 400

7-10 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Table 7-4. Mechanism Assembly

Item Part Number Description QTY

147507-100 AIL Repair Kit (kit includes AIL Button, AIL Arm and installation instructions)
203 136836 AIL Button (Receiver) 1
204 141734-100 AIL Arm (Transmitter) 1
383 136255 Mechanism Seal 1
392 141144 Transducer Cable 1
397 133228 AIL Spring
404 136721 Seal Clip 1
405 136656-000 AIL Gear

Figure 7-4. Mechanism Assembly

383

404
392

White Lead

204
Black Lead

405
397
Note black lead threads
203 through faceplate hook

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 7-11
Technical Service Manual
ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Table 7-5. Rear Case Assembly

Item Part Number Description QTY

035 142858 RS-232 Board Assembly with Nurse Call (7130X/7230X) 1

145062 Isolated RS-232 Board Assembly (7131X/7231X) 1
041 144378 ECD Board (Discriminator Board)
(7131X/7231X and 7130X/7230X with Flow Sensor Kit added)
050 140077-000 Panel Lock Keypad 1
060 141371 Power Supply/AC Off-Line Switcher 1
061 139930 Battery Cable Interface 1
140 303106 Clip, Cord 2
300 144375 Rear Case Assembly, Service (7130) 1
144126 Rear Case Assembly, Service (7131) 1
144376 Rear Case Assembly, Service (7230) 1
144127 Rear Case Assembly, Service (7231) 1
365 141369 Ground Wire, Mechanism 1
386 143320 Insulator, RS-232 (7131/7231) 1
401 141117 Speaker Assembly 1
408 141865 Fan 1
416 305318 Rubber Feet 2
417 305417 Washer, Flat 2
423 303745 Connector, PEC (7131X/7231X) 1
424 305572 Washer, Lock, 1/4” (7131X/7231X) 1
427 305316 Lock Washer (RS-232) 2
430 146008-100 Line Filter 1
437 140718 Cover, Flow Sensor Connector A/R
461 305234 Fastener, Speed Nut 2
462 305239 Standoff, The, Hex (RS-232) 2
463 305237 Screw, Mach. M3 x 10mm, PH 2
465 305236 Screw, Mach. M3 x 10mm, HXSO 4
466 305501 Screw, TPG, 6-32 x 5/16” 2
469 305531 Washer, Internal Tooth (use if line filter lug does not have a washer built in) 1
477 305526 Cable Clamp 1
479 303655 Screw, Hx40, 5/16” (for ECD Board) 1
NOTE: If model is not specified, the part can be used on all versions.

7-12 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-5a. Rear Case Assembly, Single Channel

0 500

2 PL 462
4 PL 465 437

300
427 2 PL
2 PL 417
0 600
2 PL 461 423
0 610 424

477

430
140 2 PL

386
469
466
463
365
2 PL
0 350
401 408 466

479
416 0 410 Optional
2 PL

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 7-13
Technical Service Manual
ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-5b. Rear Case Assembly, Dual Channel

0 500

462 2 PL
4 PL 465 437

300
427 2 PL

2 PL 417
0 600
2 PL 461 423
0 61 0
424

477 430
140 2 PL

386
469
466
463
365
2 PL
0 350
401 408 466

479
416
0 410 Optional
2 PL

7-14 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Table 7-6. Pole Clamp Assembly

Item Part Number Description QTY

147950-100 Battery Pole Clamp and Knob Kit (includes all items below) 1
421 144334 C-Clamp Assembly Kit (new version) 1
Kit consists of Pole Clamp, Retaining Ring and Washer
425 140408-000 Pole Clamp Lock 1
426 142793-000 Pole Clamp Knob w/Lead Screw (newer version) 1
428 305317 Wave Washer 1
431 139900 Pole Clamp Tip 1
432 305414 Spiral Roll Pin, .078X.3125,SS 1
471 305436 Compression Spring 1
483 320154 Retaining Ring 1
484 320155 Flat Washer 1

Item Part Number Description QTY

426 140380 Pole Clamp Knob (older version) 1

When replacing: Order:

Old version brass lead screw Brass knob lead screw, P/N: 140380 (limited to existing inventory)

New version steel lead screw Steel knob lead screw, P/N: 142793-000

Old C-clamp (no sleeve) Pole clamp and knob kit, P/N: 147950-100

New C-clamp (silver sleeve) C-clamp kit, P/N: 144334

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 7-15
Technical Service Manual
ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-6. Pole Clamp Assembly

426

426 432

432 431

471

Shown for reference only

421

484
425

428
483

7-16 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Table 7-7. Label/Literature

Item Part Number Description QTY

603 125569 Label, Serial Number Replacement 1

604 § UL Label
605 § CSA Label
606 147167-000 Label, Name Rating, ENG, 7130 1
142847-000 Label, Name Rating, ENG, 7230
142848 Label, Name Rating, ENG, 7131
147166-000 Label, Name Rating, ENG, 7231
145075 Label, Name Rating, SPAN, 7131
145077 Label, Name Rating, ITAL, 7131
145079 Label, Name Rating, SWED, 7131
145083 Label, Name Rating, SPAN, 7231
145085 Label, Name Rating, ITAL, 7231
145087 Label, Name Rating, SWED, 7231
145081 Label, Name Rating, FREN, 7131
145089 Label, Name Rating, FREN, 7231
607 145827 Directions for Use, English version 2.78, 7130B, 7230B
143243 Directions for Use, English version 2.78, 7131A, 7231A
144790 Directions for Use, English version 2.78 International with Symbols
7131AX02EE, 7231AX02EE
147859-103 Directions for Use, English version 4.06/4.08 Guardrails Compatible
7130D/E, 7230D/E, 7131B, 7230B
147860-103 Directions for Use, English version 4.06/4.08 with Guardrails
7130D/E, 7230D/E, 7131B, 7230B
144793 Directions for Use, Swedish version 2.78, 7131A, 7231A

144795 Directions for Use, Spanish version 2.78, 7131A, 7231A

144797 Directions for Use, Italian version 2.78, 7131A, 7231A

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 7-17
Technical Service Manual
ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Table 7-7. Label/Literature (Continued)

Item Part Number Description QTY

608 140676 Label , Start-up, No symbols, English, 713X/723X 1

141541 Label , Start-up, French/Canadian, 7130/7230
141701 Label , Start-up, French, 7X31
141702 Label , Start-up, Spanish, 7X31
147171-000 Label , Start-up, Swedish, 7X31
147183-000 Label , Start-up, Italian, 7X31
610 140296 Label, Flow Sensor A 1
611 140297 Label, Flow Sensor B (7230) 1
613 123273 Ground Symbol Label 1
623 142844-000 Patent Label 1
625 146136 Label, Cleaning, Warning, English
626 § Label, CE Mark
627 133318 Label, PE Connector (7131X/7231X) 1
630 142173 Label, RS-232 Warning, Spanish, 7X31 1
142961 Label, RS-232 Warning, English, 7X3X
143172 Label, RS-232 Warning, French, 7X31
143174 Label, RS-232 Warning, Swedish, 7X3X
143176 Label, RS-232 Warning, Italian, 7X31
654 § QC Seal

Table 7-8. Packing Materials

Item Part Number Description QTY

707 142694 Packing Material (713X)

142695 Packing Material (723X)

NOTE: If model is not specified, the part can be used on all versions.

§ Labels not sold. Placed on instrument at ALARIS Medical Systems only.

7-18 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-7. Label/Literature Locations

610

625 611

630
608 603 606
654 604
627
613

623 605
(Ground post)
626
Section A-A
(Some items not shown for clarity)

Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231 7-19
Technical Service Manual
ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

T H I S PA G E
I N T E N T I O N A L LY
LEFT BLANK

7-20 Signature Edition® GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual
ALARIS Medical Systems, Inc.
10221 Wateridge Circle
San Diego, California 92121 U.S.A.
Mail:
P.O. Box 85335
San Diego, California 92186-5335
U.S.A.

Authorized EU Representative
ALARIS Medical UK Ltd.
The Crescent, Jays Close
Basingstoke, Hampshire
RG22 4BS, UK

ALARIS®, ALARIS Medical Systems®, AccuSlide®, Dynamic Monitoring®, Guardrails®, and Signature Edition® are trademarks and registered
trademarks of ALARIS Medical Systems, Inc.

All other trademarks belong to their respective owners.

Patents, Breveté, Brevets, Brevetti, a T V T , Patente, Patenten, Patenter, Patentes, Patentit, , :

AU – 686942. CA – 78,376; 78,377; 78,378; 2,029,267; 2,125,693; 2,175,021; 2,199,156; 2,199,157; 2,199,160; 2,199,405; 2,199,631;
2,233,640. CH – +122,210; +122,211; +122,212. DE – M9501995.2; M9501996.0; M9501997.9; P3778211.8–08; P69004833.5-08;
P690244923; 69329774; 69402231T3; 69624982.0-08. DK - 0649316. EP248,632 (CH, FR, UK). EP387,724 (FR, SE, UK). EP431,310
(FR, UK). EP612,004 (FR, UK). EP748,635 (AT, BE, CH, DK, FI, FR, GR, IE, IT, LU, MC, NL, PT, SE, UK). ES - 2154651. FR – 951,426;
951,427; 951,428. HK – 1006005; 1006006; 1006041. JP – 1,003,444; 1,003,445; 1,006,528; 1,924,062; 2,553,557; 2,802,171; 3,025,018;
3,025,019; 3,064,014; 7502.678. NZ – 286445. SG - 49695. UK – 2,045,812; 2,045,813; 2,045,814. US – 4,898,576; 5,087,245;
5,096,385; 5,360,413; 5,534,691; 5,537,853; 5,542,826; 5,563,347; 5,568,912; 5,575,632; 5,601,420; 5,603,613; 5,609,576; 5,676,346;
5,681,285; 5,699,821; 5,712,795; 5,716,194; 5,719,761; 5,781,442; 5,803,917; 5,827,223; 6,211,642; 6,269,340; 6,358,225; D367,527;
D367,528; D371,194; RE35,841. Other Patents Pending

10010812 ©1997, 2004 ALARIS Medical Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.